ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller User Manual

ArmorStart® Distributed Motor

Controller

USER MANUAL

Bulletin 280G/281G, 284G

3

Important User Information

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation,

Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication.

Rockwell Automation publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the

Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control (available from your local Allen-Bradley sales office), describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication.

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is prohibited.

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations:

ATTENTION

!

Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss

Attention statements help you to:

• identify a hazard

• avoid a hazard

• recognize the consequences

IMPORTANT

Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Trademark List

ArmorStart and ControlLogix are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

ArmorConnect, DeviceLogix, PLC, RSNetWorx, RSLogix 5000, and SLC are trademarks of Rockwell Automation,

Inc. DeviceNet and the DeviceNet logo are trademarks of the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA). ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, LTD.

4

European Communities (EC)

Directive Compliance

If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the

European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.

Low Voltage and EMC Directives

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage and 89/336/EEC and Council Directive 89/336/EC Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following standard(s):

• Bulletin 280/281: EN 60947-4-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1:Contactors and motor-starters —

Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.

• Bulletin 283: EN 60947-4-2 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-2: AC semiconductor motor controllers and starters.

• Bulletin 284: EN 61800-3 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods.

This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Chapter 1

Product Overview

Chapter 2

Installation and Wiring

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Introduction ....................................................................................1-1

Description .....................................................................................1-1

Safety ArmorStart............................................................................1-1

Operation .......................................................................................1-2

Mode of Operation ..........................................................................1-2

Bulletin 280G/281G — Full-Voltage Start ................................1-2

Bulletin 284G — Sensorless Vector Control..............................1-2

Description of Features ..................................................................1-3

Overload Protection .................................................................1-3

LED Status Indication ..............................................................1-5

Fault Diagnostics .....................................................................1-5

Inputs ......................................................................................1-6

Gland Plate Entrance ...............................................................1-6

ArmorStart with DeviceNet Network Capabilities ......................1-6

DeviceLogix™ ........................................................................1-6

Peer to Peer Communications (ZIP) ..........................................1-6

EMI Filter..................................................................................1-6

Dynamic Brake Resistor ...........................................................1-7

Control Brake Contactor ..........................................................1-7

i

Receiving .......................................................................................2-1

Unpacking ......................................................................................2-1

Inspecting ......................................................................................2-1

Storing ...........................................................................................2-1

General Precautions .......................................................................2-2

Precautions for Bulletin 280G/281G Applications .............................2-2

Precautions for Bulletin 284G Applications ......................................2-2

Dimensions ....................................................................................2-4

Bulletin 280G/281G ..................................................................2-4

Bulletin 284G ...........................................................................2-6

Bulletin 1000............................................................................2-8

Wiring ..........................................................................................2-13

Power, Control, Safety Monitor Inputs, and

Ground Wiring ......................................................................2-13

Terminal Designations ..................................................................2-14

Dimensions for Safety Products.....................................................2-15

Bulletin 280G Safety Product ..................................................2-15



Bulletin 1000 Safety Product ..................................................2-19

Safety Terminal Designations .......................................................2-26

ArmorConnect Power Media .........................................................2-29

Description ............................................................................2-29

ArmorStart with ArmorConnect Connectivity ..........................2-30

Terminal Designations............................................................2-30

ArmorStart Safety with ArmorConnect Connectivity ...............2-31

Terminal Designations............................................................2-31

ArmorConnect Cable Ratings .................................................2-31

Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for

ArmorConnect Three-Phase Power Media .............................2-32

Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets ................2-32

ii

Table of Contents

Chapter 3

Bulletin 280G/281G

Programmable Parameters

Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines ............................................2-32

DeviceNet Network Installation .....................................................2-33

Other DeviceNet System Design Considerations ....................2-34

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................2-35

General Notes (Bulletin 284G only) ........................................2-35

Grounding .............................................................................2-35

Wiring ...................................................................................2-35

Introduction ....................................................................................3-1

Parameter Programming .........................................................3-1

Parameter Group Listing .................................................................3-2

DeviceLogix™ Group .....................................................................3-2

DeviceNet Group ............................................................................3-7

Starter Protection Group ...............................................................3-10

User I/O ........................................................................................3-14

Misc. Group .................................................................................3-14

ZIP Parameters ............................................................................3-16

Starter Display .............................................................................3-23

Starter Setup ................................................................................3-24

Chapter 4

Bulletin 284G Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers

Introduction ....................................................................................4-1

Parameter Programming .........................................................4-1

Parameter Group Listing .................................................................4-2

DeviceLogix™ Group .....................................................................4-3

DeviceNet Group ............................................................................4-8

Starter Protection Group ...............................................................4-12

User I/O ........................................................................................4-15

Miscellaneous Group ....................................................................4-16

Drive DeviceNet Group ..................................................................4-18

Display Group................................................................................4-20

Basic Program Group ....................................................................4-25

Advanced Program Group..............................................................4-28

Clear Type 1 Fault and Restart ......................................................4-42

Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive ..........................................................4-42

How Step Logic Works .................................................................4-55

Step Logic Settings .......................................................................4-55

Chapter 5

DeviceNet™ Commissioning

Establishing a DeviceNet Node Address ..........................................5-1

Node Commissioning using Hardware ............................................5-1

Node Commissioning using Software .............................................5-2

Building and Registering an EDS File ..............................................5-3

Table of Contents

iii

Chapter 6

Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet™

Chapter 7

Using DeviceLogix™

Chapter 8

ArmorStart® ZIP Configuration

Using the Node Commissioning Tool Inside RSNetWorx for DeviceNet ................................................................................. 5-5

System Configuration ................................................................... 5-6

Using Automap feature with default Input and Output (I/O)

Assemblies (Bulletin 280G/281G).................................................... 5-7

Default Input and Output (I/O) Assembly Formats

(Bulletin 280G/281G) ...................................................................... 5-7

Setting the Motor FLA and Overload Trip Class

(Bulletin 280G/281G) ...................................................................... 5-8

Using Automap feature with default Input and Output (I/O)

Assemblies (Bulletin 284G) ............................................................. 5-9

Default Input and Output (I/O) Assembly Formats (Bulletin 284G) .... 5-9

Setting the Motor FLA (Bulletin 284G) ........................................... 5-10

193-DCNT Product Overview ........................................................ 5-11

User Manual .......................................................................... 5-11

Bill of Material ....................................................................... 5-11

Accessories ........................................................................... 5-11

Tools Menu............................................................................ 5-12

Node Comissioning ................................................................ 5-12

Logic Controller Application Example with Explicit

Messaging ..................................................................................... 6-1

Programming the 1747-SLC .......................................................... 6-2

I/O Mapping ............................................................................ 6-2

Explicit Messaging with SLC .......................................................... 6-3

Setting up the Data File ................................................................. 6-4

Sequence of Events ....................................................................... 6-5

Programming the 1756-ControlLogix ............................................. 6-8

I/O Mapping ............................................................................ 6-8

Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix ............................................. 6-9

Setting Up the MSG Instruction ...................................................... 6-9

DeviceLogix Programming ............................................................. 7-1

DeviceLogix Programming Example ............................................... 7-2

ArmorStart Fault Bit, Status Bit, Outputs and Produced Network Bits in the DeviceLogix Ladder Editor ....................................................... 7-5

Overview ....................................................................................... 8-1

ZIP Parameter Overview ................................................................ 8-1

Data Production ............................................................................. 8-3

Data Consumption ......................................................................... 8-3

Mapping Consumed Data to the DeviceLogix Data Table. ............... 8-3

Finding ZIP bits in Device Logix Editor........................................... 8-12

iv

Chapter 9

Diagnostics

Table of Contents

Chapter 10

Troubleshooting

Appendix A

Specifications

Overview ........................................................................................9-1

Protection Programming ..........................................................9-1

Fault Display ..................................................................................9-1

Clear Fault .....................................................................................9-2

Fault Codes ....................................................................................9-2

Fault Definitions .............................................................................9-3

Short Circuit ............................................................................9-3

Overload Trip ...........................................................................9-3

Phase Loss ..............................................................................9-3

Phase Short..............................................................................9-3

Ground Fault ............................................................................9-3

Stall .........................................................................................9-3

Control Power ..........................................................................9-3

I/O Fault ..................................................................................9-3

Over Temperature ...................................................................9-3

Phase Imbalance .....................................................................9-3

Over Current.............................................................................9-4

DeviceNet™ Power Loss .........................................................9-4

Internal Communication Fault ...................................................9-4

DC Bus Fault ............................................................................9-4

EEPROM Fault .........................................................................9-4

Hardware Fault ........................................................................9-4

Restart Retries .........................................................................9-4

Miscellaneous Faults ................................................................9-4

Introduction ..................................................................................10-1

Bulletin 280G/281G Troubleshooting .............................................10-2

Bulletin 284G Troubleshooting.......................................................10-5

Fault Definitions .....................................................................10-5

Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1- Dynamic Brake....10-7

Internal Drive Faults .............................................................10-10

DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures ......................................10-14

Control Module Replacement (Bulletin 280G/281G) .....................10-15

Control Module Replacement (Bulletin 284G)...............................10-16

Base Module Replacement (Bulletin 280G/281G).........................10-17

Base Module Replacement (Bulletin 284G) ..................................10-19

Bulletin 280G/281G Specifications ..................................................A-1

Bulletin 284G Specifications............................................................A-6

ArmorConnect™ Three-Phase Power Media ................................A-11

Patchcords ............................................................................A-11

Power Tees & Reducer ..........................................................A-12

Power Receptacles ................................................................A-13

Appendix B

Bulletin 280G/281G CIP Information

Electronic Data Sheets ...................................................................B-1

DOL Type Product Codes and Name Strings ...................................B-1

DOL Reversing Type Product Codes and Name String .....................B-2

DeviceNet Objects ..........................................................................B-2

Appendix C

Bulletin 284G CIP Information

Table of Contents

Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001 .........................................B-3

Identity Objects ..............................................................................B-3

Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002 ......................................B-3

DeviceNet Object — CLASS CODE 0x0003 .....................................B-4

Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004 .....................................B-5

Custom Parameter Based

“Word-wise” I/O Assemblies ..........................................................B-5

“Word-wise” Bit-Packed Assemblies ..............................................B-6

Standard Distributed Motor Controller I/O Assemblies .....................B-7

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output

(Consumed) Assemblies ..........................................................B-7

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input

(Produced) Assemblies ............................................................B-8

Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 .................................B-10

Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008 ...................B-14

Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009 ..................B-15

Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements ......................B-16

DOP Instances 1 and 2 Special Behavior ...............................B-16

Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F ..................................B-18

Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010 ........................B-19

Discrete Input Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001D ..................B-20

Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E ................B-21

Control Supervisor Object -CLASS CODE 0x0029 ..........................B-22

Acknowledge Handler Object — CLASS CODE 0x002b .................B-23

Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c .....................................B-24

DeviceNet Interface Object -CLASS CODE 0x00B4 ........................B-25

v

Electronic Data Sheets ...................................................................C-1

VFD Type Product Codes and Name Strings ....................................C-1

DeviceNet Objects ..........................................................................C-2

Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001 .........................................C-2

Identity Objects ..............................................................................C-3

Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002 ......................................C-3

DeviceNet Object — CLASS CODE 0x0003 .....................................C-4

Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004 .....................................C-5

Custom Parameter Based

“Word-wise” I/O Assemblies ..........................................................C-6

“Word-wise” Bit-Packed Assemblies ..............................................C-6

Standard Distributed Motor Controller I/O Assemblies .....................C-8

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output

(Consumed) Assemblies ..........................................................C-8

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input

(Produced) Assemblies ............................................................C-9

Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller Input

(Produced) Assemblies ...........................................................C-10

PowerFlex Native Assemblies .................................................C-11

Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 .................................C-13

Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008 ...................C-18

Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009 ..................C-19

vi

Table of Contents

Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements ......................C-20

DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior ...............................C-20

DOP Instances 1, 2, 9, and 10 Special Behavior ....................C-22

Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F ..................................C-24

Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010 ........................C-25

Discrete Input Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001D ..................C-26

Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E ................C-27

Control Supervisor Object -CLASS CODE 0x0029 ..........................C-28

Acknowledge Handler Object — CLASS CODE 0x002b .................C-29

DeviceNet Interface Object -CLASS CODE 0x00B4 ........................C-30

Appendix D

Group Motor Installations

Appendix E

Accessories

Appendix F

Safety I/O Module and TÜV

Requirements

Application of ArmorStart® Controllers in Group Installation ...........D-1

IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor .......................................................... E-3

ArmorStart Safety-Related Parts...................................................... F-1

ArmorBlock Guard I/O Modules ....................................................... F-2

Specifications .......................................................................... F-2

ArmorBlock Guard I/O Recommended Compatible

Cables and Connectors.................................................................... F-3

Safety-Related Specifications.......................................................... F-6

Maintenance and Internal Part Replacement.................................... F-6

Troubleshooting .............................................................................. F-7

Appendix G

Renewal Parts

Appendix H

PID Setup

Renewal Parts .................................................................................G-1

Exclusive Control.............................................................................H-1

Trim Control ....................................................................................H-2

PID Reference and Feedback...........................................................H-3

PID Deadband .................................................................................H-3

PID Preload .....................................................................................H-4

PID Limits .......................................................................................H-4

PID Gains ........................................................................................H-4

Guidelines For Adjusting PID Gains ..................................................H-5

Appendix I

Step Logic, Basic Logic and Timer/

Counter Functions

Step Logic Using Timed Steps .......................................................... I-2

Step Logic Using Basic Logic Functions............................................ I-3

Timer Function................................................................................. I-4

Counter Function.............................................................................. I-4

Step Logic Parameters ..................................................................... I-5

Introduction

Description

Safety ArmorStart

Chapter

1

Product Overview

This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the Bulletin 280G/281G and 284G ArmorStart®

Distributed Motor Controllers.

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers are integrated, preengineered, starters with Bulletin 280G/281G for full-voltage and reversing applications and Bulletin 284G for variable frequency AC drives applications. The ArmorStart offers a robust IP67/NEMA Type

4 enclosure design, which is suitable for water wash down environments.

The modular “plug and play” design offers simplicity in wiring the installation. The quick disconnects for the I/O, communications, and motor connections reduce the wiring time and eliminate wiring errors.

The ArmorStart offers as standard, six DC inputs to be used with sensors for monitoring and controlling the application process. The

ArmorStart’s LED status indication and built-in diagnostics capabilities allow ease of maintenance and troubleshooting.

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller offers short circuit protection per UL508 and IEC 60947. The ArmorStart is rated for local-disconnect service by incorporating the Bulletin 140 Motor

Protector as the local-disconnect, eliminating the need for additional components. The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers are suitable for group motor installations.

The safety version of the ArmorStart provides a safety solution integrated into DeviceNet Safety installations. The Bulletin 280/281/

284 Safety ArmorStart achieves Category 4 functionality by using redundant contactors. The Safety ArmorStart offers a quick connects via the gland plate to the 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 safety I/O module. The

Bulletin 1732DS Safety I/O inputs will monitor the status of the safety rated contactors inside the ArmorStart. The Bulletin 1732DS

Safety I/O outputs to provide 24V DC power for control power to the

ArmorStart.

Note: The Bulletin 280/281/284 Safety ArmorStart is suitable for safety applications up to Safety Category 4PL e (TÜV assessment per ISO 13849-1:2008). T

Ü

V compliance letter is available upon request.

Note: For additional information regarding the

1732DS-IB8XOBV4 safety I/O module, see publication

1791DS-UM001*-EN-P.

1-2

Operation

Product Overview

Mode of Operation

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate threephase squirrel-cage induction motors as follows:

Bulletin 280G/281G: up to 10 Hp (7.5 kW) @ 460V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Bulletin 284G: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) @ 460V AC.

Bulletin 1000: 7.5 Hp (5.5 kW), 10 Hp (7.5 kW) and 15 Hp (11 kW)

@ 460V AC, 50/60 Hz.

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller will accept a control power input of 120V AC.


Full-Voltage Start

This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting, in which full inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The

ArmorStart Bulletin 280G offers full-voltage starting and the Bulletin

281G offers full-voltage starting for reversing applications.

100%

Percent

Voltage

Time (seconds)

Bulletin 284G

Sensorless Vector Control

• Sensorless Vector Control provides exceptional speed regulation and very high levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive

• The Autotune feature allows the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controller to adapt to individual motor characteristics.

• To select this method of operation, select V for the Mode of

Operation listed in the catalog structure. See

Publication 280-SG001*.

Description of Features

10000

1000

100

10

1

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

Cold

Hot

Product Overview

1-3

Overload Protection

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard, electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an I

2 t algorithm. The

ArmorStart’s overload protection is programmable via the communication network, providing the user with flexibility.

The Bulletin 280G/281G overload trip class can be selected for class

10, 15, 20 protection. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.

Figure 1.1 Overload Trip Curves

10000

100

10000

1

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

% of

Class 20 Overload Curves

Class 20

Cold

Hot

100

Cold

Hot

1

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

1-4

Product Overview

The Bulletin 284G ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard, electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an I

2 t algorithm. The ArmorStart’s overload protection is programmable via the communication network providing the user with flexibility.

Programming the Motor OL Current parameter provides class 10 overload protection for the Bulletin 284G Distributed Motor

Controller. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.


% of P132 (Motor NP Hertz) % of P132 (Motor NP Hertz)

% of P132 (Motor NP Hertz)

Product Overview

LED Status Indication

The LED Status Indication provides 4 status LEDs and a Reset button. The LEDs provide status indication for the following:

1-5

• POWER LED

The LED is illuminated solid green when control power is present and with the proper polarity

• RUN LED

This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control power are present

• NETWORK LED

This bi-color (red/green) LED indicates the status of the communication link

• FAULT LED

Indicates Controller Fault (Trip) condition

The “Reset Button” acts as a local trip reset.

Figure 1.3 Status Indication and Reset

Fault Indication

• Short Circuit

• Overload

• Phase Loss

• Control Power Loss

• Control Power Fuse Detection

• I/O Fault

• Over Temperature

• DeviceNet™ Power Loss

• EEprom Fault

• Hardware Fault

Fault Diagnostics

Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart Distributed

Motor Controller help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick re-starting.

Available on Bulletin:

280G/281G

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

284G

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Fault Indication

• Phase Imbalance

• Miscellaneous Fault

• Brake Fuse Detection

• Internal Comm. Fault

• DC Bus Fault

• Ground Fault

• Overcurrent

• Restart Retries

• Stall

• Phase Short

Available on Bulletin:

280G/281G

X

284G

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1-6

Product Overview

Inputs

The inputs are single-keyed (2 inputs per connector), which are sourced from DeviceNet power (24V DC), with LED status indication.

Gland Plate Entrance

The ArmorStart product offers connectivity to the ArmorConnect™ power media. Receptacles are provided for connectivity to both threephase and control power media.

ArmorStart with DeviceNet Network Capabilities

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller delivers advanced capabilities to access parameter settings and provides fault diagnostics, and remote start-stop control. DeviceNet is the communication protocol, provided with the ArmorStart Bulletin

280G/281G or 284G Distributed Motor Controller.

DeviceLogix™

DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. DeviceLogix is programmed using Boolean math operations, such as, AND, OR,

NOT, Timers, Counters, and Latches. DeviceLogix can run as a standalone application, independent of the network. However, 24V DC must be supplied at the DeviceNet connector to power the inputs.

Peer to Peer Communications (ZIP)

The zone control capabilities of ArmorStart Distributed Motor

Controllers is ideal for large horsepower (0.5…15 Hp) motored conveyors. The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers have builtin DeviceNet communications, DeviceLogix technology, and the added Zone Interlocking Parameters (ZIP) which allow one

ArmorStart to receive data directly, from up to four other DeviceNet nodes, without going through a network scanner. These direct communications between conveyor zones are beneficial in a merge, diverter, or accumulation conveyor application.

EMI Filter (Bulletin 284G only)

The EMI Filter is required if the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controller must be CE-compliant. A shielded

4-conductor patchcord or cordset no longer than 14 meters, must be used to comply with the CE requirement.

Product Overview

1-7

Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284G only)

The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor plug and play design offers simplicity in writing and installation. The factory installed option of

DB1 must be selected in order to have the quick disconnect connectivity. The cable length of the IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is available in two lengths, 0.5 meter and 1 meter. See Appendix G,

Accessories, for available IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistors.

Note: The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is used only with the -DB1 factory-installed option.

Control Brake Contactor

An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On/Off. The motor brake is powered from the control voltage circuit.

1-8

Notes:

Product Overview

Receiving

Unpacking

Inspecting

Storing

Chapter

2

Installation and Wiring

It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill. Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking, it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment.

Remove all packing material, wedges, or braces from within and around the starter. Remove all packing material from device(s).

After unpacking, check the nameplate catalog number(s) against the purchase order.

The controller should remain in its shipping container prior to installation. If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage.

• Store in a clean, dry location.

• Store within an ambient temperature range of –25…+85 °C

(–13…+185 °F).

• Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, noncondensing.

• Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.

• Do not store equipment in a construction area.

2-2

Installation and Wiring

General Precautions

Precautions for Bulletin 280G/281G

Applications

In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual, the following statements, which are general to the system, must be read and understood.

ATTENTION

!

The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge)-sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the assembly.

Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Publication

8000-4.5.2, Guarding against Electrostatic

Discharge, or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks.

ATTENTION

!

An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage components or reduce product life. Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures, may result in malfunction of the system.

ATTENTION

!

Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

ATTENTION

To prevent electrical shock, open disconnect prior to connecting and disconnecting cables. Risk of shock - environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles.

!

ATTENTION

!

Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Precautions for Bulletin 284G

Applications


2-3

ATTENTION

!

The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs (R, S, T [L1, L2, L3]).

Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death. Darkened display LEDs are not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels. Risk of shock-environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles.

ATTENTION

!

Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

2-4


Dimensions for Bulletin 280G/281G

Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.

Figure 2.1 Dimensions for IP67/NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect

Connectivity


Figure 2.2 Bulletin 280G/281G ArmorStart® with DeviceNet™

Communication Protocol

2-5

LED Status

Indication

Local Disconnect

6 Inputs

(Micro/M12)

DeviceNet

Connection

(Mini/M18)

Control Power

Receptacle Ground Terminal

3-Phase Power

Receptacle

Motor

Connection

Control Brake

2-6


Dimensions for Bulletin 284G


Figure 2.3 Dimensions for 2 Hp (1.5 kW) and below @ 460V AC, IP67/NEMA

Type 4 with ArmorConnect connectivity

Dimensions for Bulletin 284G,

Continued


2-7


Figure 2.4 Dimensions for 3 Hp (2.2 kW) and above @ 460V AC, IP67/NEMA


2-8


Dimensions for Bulletin 1000


Figure 2.5 Dimensions for 7.5 Hp (5.5 kW) and 10 Hp (7.5 kW) @ 460V AC,

IP67/NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity

Dimensions for Bulletin 1000,

Continued


2-9


Figure 2.6 Dimensions for 15 Hp (11 kW) @ 460V AC, IP67/NEMA Type 4 with

ArmorConnect Connectivity

2-10


Local Disconnect

Figure 2.7 Bulletin 284G ArmorStart

LED Status

Indication

6 Inputs

(Micro/M12)

DeviceNet

Connection

(Mini/M18)

Control Power

Receptacle

Ground

Terminal

3-Phase

Receptacle

Dynamic

Brake Connector

Motor

Connector

Control Brake

Connector

Figure 2.8 Bulletin 1000 ArmorStart


2-11

2-12



Wiring


2-13

Power, Control, and Ground Wiring

Table 2.1 provides the power, control, safety inputs, and ground wire capacities, and the tightening torque requirements. The power, control, ground, and safety monitor terminals will accept a maximum of two wires per terminal.

Table 2.1 Power, Control, Safety Input, Ground Wire Size, and Torque

Specifications

Terminals

Power and

Ground

Control and Safety

Inputs

Wire Size

Primary/Secondary

Terminal:

1.5…4.0 mm

2

(#16 …#10 AWG)

1.0 mm

2

…4.0 mm

2

(#18…#10 AWG)

Torque

Primary Terminal:

10.8 lb.-in.

(1.2 N•m)

Secondary Terminal:

4.5 lb.-in

(0.5 N•m)

6.2 lb.-in

(0.7 N•m)

Wire Strip Length

0.35 in. (9 mm)

0.35 in. (9 mm)

2-14


Terminal Designations for Bulletins

280G, 281G, and 284G

As shown in the next figure, the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains terminals for power, control, and ground wiring. Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate.

Figure 2.10 ArmorStart Power, Control and Terminals

Table 2.2 Power, Control, and Ground Terminal Designations

Terminal Designations No. of Poles Description

A1 (+)

A2 (-)

PE

1/L1

3/L3

5/L5

2

2

2

2

2

2

Control Power Input

Control Power Common

Ground

Line Power Phase A

Line Power Phase B

Line Power Phase C


Safety Product


2-15


Figure 2.11 Dimensions for Bulletin 280G Safety Product

2-16



Safety Product


Figure 2.12 Dimensions for Bulletin 281G Safety Product


Safety Product


2-17


Figure 2.13 Dimensions for 2 Hp (1.5 kW) and below @ 460V AC, IP67/NEMA


2-18



Safety Product, Continued


Figure 2.14 Dimensions for 3 Hp (2.2 kW) and 5 Hp (3.0 kW) and below @

460V AC, IP67/NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect connectivity


Safety Product


2-19


Figure 2.15 Dimensions for 7.5 Hp (5.5 kW) and 10 Hp (7.5 kW) @ 460V AC,

IP67/NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity

2-20



Safety Product, Continued


Figure 2.16 Dimensions for 15 Hp @ 460V AC, IP67/NEMA Type 4 with

ArmorConnect Connectivity


Figure 2.17 Bulletin 280G Safety ArmorStart

2-21

LED Status

Indication

Local Disconnect

6 Inputs

(Micro/M12)

DeviceNet

Connection

(Mini/M18)

A1/A2

SM

Control Power

Receptacle

3-Phase Power

Receptacle

Motor

Connection

Control Brake

2-22


Local Disconnect


6 Inputs

(Micro/M12)

LED Status

Indication

DeviceNet

Connection

(Mini/M18)

A1/A2

SM

Control Power

3-Phase Power

Receptacle

Motor

Connection

Control Brake

Local Disconnect



2-23

LED Status

Indication

6 Inputs

(Micro/M12)

DeviceNet

Connection

(Mini/M18)

A1/A2

SM

Control Power

3-Phase Power

Receptacle

Motor

Connection

Control Brake

Dynamic Brake

2-24


Figure 2.20 Bulletin 1000 Safety ArmorStart



2-25

2-26


Safety Terminal Designations

As shown in the next figure, the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains terminals for power, safety I/O inputs, control, and ground wiring.

Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate.

Figure 2.22 Bulletin 280G ArmorStart Safety Power, Control and Terminals

Table 2.3 Power, Control, Safety Monitor, and Ground Terminal Designations


SM1

SM2

A1 (+)

A2 (-)

PE

1/L1

3/L3

5/L5

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Safety I/O Input

Safety I/O Input

Control Power Input


Ground

Line Power Phase A

Line Power Phase B

Line Power Phase C

Safety Terminal Designations,

Continued


2-27



Figure 2.23 Bulletin 281G ArmorStart Safety Power, Control and Terminals



SM1

SM2

A1 (+)

A2 (-)

PE

1/L1

3/L3

5/L5

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Safety I/O Input

Safety I/O Input

Control Power Input


Ground

Line Power Phase A

Line Power Phase B

Line Power Phase C

2-28


Safety Terminal Designations,

Continued



Figure 2.24 ArmorStart Safety 2 Hp Power, Control and Terminals



SM1

SM2

A1 (+)

A2 (-)

PE

1/L1

3/L3

5/L5

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Safety I/O Input

Safety I/O Input

Control Power Input


Ground

Line Power Phase A

Line Power Phase B

Line Power Phase C

ArmorConnect Power Media


2-29

Description

The ArmorConnect power media offers both three-phase and control power cable system of cord sets, patch cords, receptacles, tees, reducers and accessories to be utilized with the ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controller. These cable system components allow quick connection of ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers, there by reducing installation time. They provide for repeatable, reliable connection of the three-phase and control power to the ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controller and motor by providing a plug-and-play environment that also avoids system mis-wiring. When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor

Controllers (Bulletin 280G/281G and 284G) use only the Bulletin

280 ArmorConnect power media.

Figure 2.25 Three-Phase Power System Overview

Enclosure

Bulletin 1492FB

Branch Circuit

Protective Device

Bulletin 1606

Power Supply

1606-XLSDNET4

DeviceNet

Power Supply

PLC

Bulletin 280/281

ArmorStart

RESET

Bulletin 280/281

ArmorStart

RESET

Bulletin 284

ArmorStart

➊ Three-Phase Power Trunk- PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end

Example Part Number: 280-PWR35A-M*

➋ Three-Phase Drop Cable- PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end

Example Part Number: 280-PWR35A-M*

➌ Three-Phase Power Tee and Reducer -

Tee connects to a single drop line to trunk with quick change connectors – Part Number: 280-T35

Reducing Tee connects to a single drop line (Mini) to trunk (Quick change) connector – Part Number: 280-RT35

➍ Three-Phase Power Receptacles -

Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads – Part Number: 280-M35F-M1

2-30


Figure 2.26 Control Power Media System Overview

Enclosure

Bulletin 1492FB

Branch Circuit

Protective Device

Bulletin 1606

Power Supply

1606-XLSDNET4

DeviceNet

Power Supply

PLC

Bulletin 280/281

ArmorStart

RESET

Bulletin 280/281

ArmorStart

RESET

Bulletin 284

ArmorStart

➏ Control Power Media Patchcords - PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end

Example Part Number: 889N-F3AFNU-*F

➐ Control Power Tees - The Control Power tee (Part Number: 898N-33PB-N4KF) is used with a patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor

Controller.

➑ Control Power Receptacles - Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads –

Part Number: 888N-D3AF1-*F


ArmorStart with ArmorConnect Connectivity

2-31

Control Power

Receptacle

Terminal Designations

Ground

Terminal

Three-Phase

Power

Receptacle

Terminal

Designations

A1 (+)

A2 (-)

PE

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

Description

Control Power Input

Color Code

Black

Control Power Common White

Ground Green/Yellow

Line Power - Phase A Black

Line Power - Phase B White

Line Power - Phase C Red

ArmorConnect Cable Ratings

The ArmorConnect power media cables are rated per UL Type TC

600V 90 °C Dry 75 °C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90 °C or STOOW 105 °C 600V - CSA STOOW 600V FT2.

2-32


ArmorStart Safety with ArmorConnect Connectivity

A1/A2 -24V DC

Control Power rm

1732DS Safety

I/O Module Outu

Safety Monitor

Input from

1732DS Safey

I/O Module Inpt

120V AC

Aux. Powr for

Conto Brake

Ground

Terminal

Three-Phase

Power

Recepale

Terminal Designations

A2 (-)

PE

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

Terminal

Designations

SM1

SM2

A1 (+)

Description Color Code

Safety Monitor Input

Safety Monitor Input

Brown

White

Control Power Input Brown

Control Power Common Blue

Ground Green/Yellow

Line Power - Phase A Black

Line Power - Phase B White

Line Power - Phase C Red

ArmorConnect Cable Ratings

The ArmorConnect power media cables are rated per UL Type TC

600V 90 °C Dry 75 °C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90 °C or STOOW 105 °C 600V - CSA STOOW 600V FT2.

Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets

Wiring and Workmanship

Guidelines


2-33

Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect

Three-Phase Power Media

When using ArmorConnect three-phase power media, fuses can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device, for the group motor installations. The following fuse types are recommended: Class

CC, T, or J type fuses. A 100 A circuit breaker (Allen-Bradley140

H-Frame) can be used for the motor branch protective device, for the group motor installations when using only the following

ArmorConnect Power Media components: 280-M35M-M1,

280-M35F-M1, 280-T35, and 280-PWRM35*-M*.

Maximum Ratings

Voltage (V)

Sym. Amps RMS

Fuse

Circuit Breaker

480Y/277

65 kA

100 A

100 A

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers are listed for use with each other in group installations per NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for

Industrial Machinery. When applied according to the group motor installation requirements, two or more motors, of any rating or controller type, are permitted on a single branch circuit. Group Motor

Installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and

Canada.

Note: For additional information regarding group motor installations with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor

Controller, see Appendix D.

In addition to conduit and seal-tite raceway, it is acceptable to utilize cable that is dual rated Tray Cable, Type TC-ER and Cord, STOOW, for power and control wiring on ArmorStart installations. In the USA and Canada installations, the following guidance is outlined by the

NEC and NFPA 79.

2-34


DeviceNet Network Installation

In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation, and where the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or channels, Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC (Metal Clad) cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC-ER (Exposed

Run)* shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or device as open wiring. The cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) and installed in a “good workmanlike” manner. Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable.

*Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements were designated and marked “Open Wiring”. Cable so marked is equivalent to the present Type TC-ER and can be used.

While the ArmorStart is intended for installation in factory floor environments of industrial establishments, the following must be taken into consideration when locating the ArmorStart in the application: Cables, including those for control voltage including

24V DC and communications, are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic on a continuous basis. Location of the ArmorStart to minimize exposure to continual traffic is recommended. If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable, other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be considered. Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent exposure and/or damage.

Additionally, if conduit or other raceways are not used, it is recommended that strain relief fittings be utilized when installing the cables for the control and power wiring through the conduit openings.

The working space around the ArmorStart may be minimized as the

ArmorStart does not require examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance while energized. In lieu of this service, the ArmorStart is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lockout/tag-out procedures have been employed.

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains the equivalent of 30 in. (0.76 m) of DeviceNet drop cable's electrical characteristics and therefore 30 in. of drop cable must be included in the DeviceNet drop cable budget for each ArmorStart in addition to actual drop cable required for the installation.

Other DeviceNet System Design Considerations

The separation of the control power and DeviceNet power is recommended as a good design practice. This minimizes the load on the DeviceNet supply, and prevents transients which may be present on the control power system from influencing the communication controls.

Electromagnetic

Compatibility

(EMC)


2-35

The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.

General Notes (Bulletin 284G only)

• The motor Cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents

• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/ installation compliance.

• Using an EMI filter with any drive rating, may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked.

Grounding

Connect a grounding conductor to the terminal provided as standard on each ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. Refer to Table 2.2 for grounding provision location. There is also an externally available ground terminal. Refer to Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.7.

Wiring

Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups: power, control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect.

• Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should be 6 in. (16 cm).

• Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.

• Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.

• Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 3 in. (8 cm).

2-36

Notes:


Introduction

Chapter

3

Bulletin 280G/281G Programmable

Parameters

This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.

Parameter Programming

Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type.

Refer to Chapter 5, DeviceNet™ Commissioning for instructions in using RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet to modify parameter settings.

Important: Resetting the Factory Default Values Parameter 47,

Set to Defaults, allows the installer to reset all parameters to the factory default values. It also resets the MAC ID to its factory default after DeviceNet Power is cycled if switches are set >63.

Important: Parameter setting changes downloaded to the

ArmorStart™ take effect immediately, even during a

“running” status.

Important: Parameter setting changes made in a configuration tool such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet do not take effect in the ArmorStart until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device.

3-2

Bulletin 280G/281G Programmable Parameters

Parameter Group Listing

The Bulletin 280G/281G ArmorStart contains eight parameter groups. The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix, DeviceNet,

Starter Protection, User I/O, Misc. Parameter, ZIP Parameters, Starter

Display and Starter Setup, are discussed in this chapter.

Table 3.1 Parameter Group Listing

DeviceLogix

1 Hdw Inputs

2 Network Inputs

3 Network Outputs

4 Trip Status

5 Starter Status

6 DNet Status

7 Starter Command

8 Network Override

9 Comm Override

DeviceNet

Starter

Protection

10 Autobaud Enable 22 Breaker Type

11 Consumed IO Assy 23 PrFltResetMode

12 Produced IO Assy 24 Pr Fault Enable

13 Prod Assy Word 0 25 Pr Fault Reset

14 Prod Assy Word 1 26 StrtrDN FltState

15 Prod Assy Word 2 27 StrtrDN FltValue

16 Prod Assy Word 3 28 StrtrDN IdlState

17 Consumed IO Size 29 StrtrDN IdlValue

18 Produced IO Size 61 Last PR Fault

19 Starter COS Mask 62 Warning Status

20 Net Out COS Mask

21 DNet Voltage

User I/O

30 Off-to-On Delay

31 On-to-Off Delay

32 In Sink/Source

Misc.

ZIP Parameters Starter Display Starter Setup

45 Keypad Mode

46 Keypad Disable

47 Set To Defaults

56 Base Enclosure

57 Base Option

67 AutoRun Zip 101 Phase A Current 106 FLA Setting

68 Zone Produced EPR 102 Phase B Current 107 Overload Class

69 Zone Produced PIT 103 Phase C Current 108 OL Reset Level

70 Zone #1 MacId

71 Zone #2 MacId

58 Wiring Option 72 Zone #3 MacId

59 Starter Enclosure 73 Zone #4 MacId

60 Starter Options 74 Zone #1 Health

75 Zone #2 Health

104 Average Current

105% Therm Utilized

76 Zone #3 Health

77 Zone #4 Health

78 Zone #1 Mask

79 Zone #2 Mask

80 Zone #3 Mask

81 Zone #4 Mask

82 Zone #1 Offset

83 Zone #2 Offset

84 Zone #3 Offset

85 Zone #4 Offset

86 Zone #1 EPR

87 Zone #2 EPR

88 Zone #3 EPR

89 Zone #4 EPR

90 Zone #1 Control

91 Zone #2 Control

92 Zone #3 Control

93 Zone #4 Control

94 Zone #1 Key

95 Zone #2 Key

96 Zone #3 Key

97 Zone #4 Key

98 Device Value Key

99 Zone Ctrl Enable

DeviceLogix™ Group

Hdw Inputs

This parameter provides status of hardware inputs

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

1

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

15

0

—

—

—

X

5

—

—

—

—

X

—

4

—

—


3-3

—

X

—

—

3

—

—

Bit

2

—

—

X

—

—

—

1

—

X

—

—

—

—

Network Inputs

This parameter provides status of network inputs

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

—

—

—

—

0

X

—

2

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

65535

0

Function

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Bit

Function

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Net Input 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Net Input 1

— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Net input 2

— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Net Input 3

— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Net Input 4

— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Net Input 5

— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Net Input 6

— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Net Input 7

— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Net Input 8

— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Net Input 9

— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Net Input 10

— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Net Input 11

— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Input 12

— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Input 13

— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Input 14

X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Input 15

Network Outputs

This parameter provides status of network outputs

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

3

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

32767

0

3-4


Bit

Function

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Net Output 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Net Output 1

— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Net Output 2

— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Net Output 3

— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Net Output 4

— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Net Output 5

— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Net Output 6

— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Net Output 7

— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Net Output 8

— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Net Output 9

— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Net Output 10

— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Net Output 11

— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Output 12

— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Output 13

X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Net Output 14

Trip Status

This parameter provides trip identification

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

4

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix Setup

—

0

16383

0

Bit

Function

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — X

— — — — — — — — — — — — X —

— — — — — — — — — — — X — —

— — — — — — — — — — X — — —

— — — — — — — — — X — — — —

Short Circuit

Overload

Phase Loss

Reserved

Reserved

— — — — — — — — X — — — — —

— — — — — — — X — — — — — —

Control Power

I/O Fault

— — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature

— — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance

— — — — X — — — — — — — — — Dnet Power Loss

— — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

— — X — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

— X — — — — — — — — — — — —

X — — — — — — — — — — — — —

EEprom

HW Fault

Starter Status

This parameter provides the status of the starter


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

5

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

16383

0

3-5

Bit

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — X

— — — — — — — — — — — — X —

— — — — — — — — — — — X — —

— — — — — — — — — — X — — —

— — — — — — — — — X — — — —

— — — — — — — — X — — — — —

— — — — — — — X — — — — — —

— — — — — — X — — — — — — —

— — — — — X — — — — — — — —

— — — — X — — — — — — — — —

— — — X — — — — — — — — — —

— — X — — — — — — — — — — —

— X — — — — — — — — — — — —

X — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Function

Tripped

Warning

Running Fwd

Running Rev

Ready

Net Ctl Status

Reserved

At Reference

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Keypad Hand

HOA Status

140M On

DNet Status

This parameter provides status of the DeviceNet connection

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

6

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

32, 767

0

3-6


Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Function:

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Explicit Connection

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — I/O Connection

— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —

— — — — — — — — X X X — — — — —

— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —

Explicit Fault

I/O Fault

I/O Idle

Reserved

ZIP 1 Cnxn

— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

ZIP 1 Flt

ZIP 2 Cnxn

ZIP 2 Flt

ZIP 3 Cnxn

ZIP 3 Flt

ZIP 4 Cnxn

ZIP 4 Flt

Starter Command

The parameter provides the status of the starter command.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

7

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

255

0

Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — X

— — — — — — X —

— — — — — X — —

— — — — X — — —

— — — X — — — —

— — X — — — — —

— X — — — — — —

X — — — — — — —

Network Override

This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Function:

Run Fwd

Run Rev

Fault Reset

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

8

GET/SET

BOOL

DeviceLogix

—

0

1

0

DeviceNet Group

Comm Override

This parameter allows for local logic to override the absence of an I/O connection

0 = Disable

1 = Enable


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

9

GET/SET

BOOL

DeviceLogix

—

0

1

0

3-7

Autobaud Enable

When this parameter is enabled, the device will attempt to determine the network baud rate and set its baud rate to the same, provided network traffic exists.

At least one node with an established baud rate must exist on the network for autobaud to occur.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Consumed I/O Assy

This parameter selects the format of the I/O data consumed.

Enter a Consumed I/O assembly instance number to select a data format.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Produced I/O Assy

This parameter selects the format of the I/O data produced.

Enter a Produces I/O assembly instance number to select a data format.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

11

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

187

160

12

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

190

161

10

GET/SET

BOOL

DeviceNet

—

0

1

1

3-8


Prod Assy Word 0

This parameter is used to build bytes 0-1 for produced assembly

120

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Produced Assy Word 1


120

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value



120

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value



120

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Consumed I/O Size

This parameter reflects the consumed I/O data size in bytes.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

13

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

108

1

14

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

108

4

15

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

108

5

16

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

108

6

17

GET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

8

1

Produced I/O Size


This parameter reflects the produced I/O data size in bytes.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

18

GET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

8

2

3-9

➊

➋

Starter COS Mask

This parameter allows the installer to define the change-ofstate conditions that will result in a change-of-state message being produced

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Bulletin 280G products.

Bulletin 281G products.

19

GET/SET

WORD

DeviceNet

—

0

16383

16149

➊

16157

➋

12

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

13

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

6

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

4

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Function

Tripped

Warning

Running Fwd

Running Rev

Ready

NET Ctl Status

140M On

Reserved

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

3-10


Net Out COS Mask

This parameter sets the bits that will trigger a COS message when network outputs change state.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

20

GET/SET

WORD

DeviceNet

—

0

32767

0

13

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

14

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

Dnet Voltage

This parameter provides the voltage measurement for the

DeviceNet network

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Starter Protection Group

Breaker Type

This parameter identifies the

Bulletin 140M used in this product

0 = 140M-D8N-C10

1 = 140M-D8N-C25

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

22

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0

Function

Net Output 0

Net Output 1

Net Output 2

Net Output 3

Net Output 4

Net Output 5

Net Output 6

Net Output 7

Net Output 8

Net Output 9

Net Output 10

Net Output 11

Net Output 12

Net Output 13

Net Output 14

21

GET

UINT

DeviceNet xx.xx Volts

0

6500

0

PrFlt Reset Mode

This parameter configures the

Protection Fault reset mode.

0= Manual

1= Automatic


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

23

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0

3-11

Pr Fault Enable

This parameter enables the

Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

24

GET/SET

WORD

Starter Protection Setup

—

0

16383

12419

Bit

Function

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — — — — — — — X

— — — — — — — — — — — — X —

— — — — — — — — — — — X — —

— — — — — — — — — — X — — —

— — — — — — — — — X — — — —

Short Circuit

Overload

Phase Loss

Reserved

Reserved

— — — — — — — — X — — — — —

— — — — — — — X — — — — — —

Control Power

I/O Fault

— — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature

— — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance

— — — — X — — — — — — — — — Dnet Power Loss

— — — X — — — — — — — — — —

— — X — — — — — — — — — — —

Reserved

Reserved

— X — — — — — — — — — — — —

X — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Eeprom

HW Fault

Pr Fault Reset

This parameter resets the

Protection Fault on a transition of

0-->1.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

25

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

1

0

—

0

3-12


StrtrDN FltState

This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 defines how the starter will respond when a

DeviceNet fault occurs. When set to “1”, hold to last state occurs.

When set to “0”, will go to DnFlt

Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 27.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

StrtrDN FltValue

This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a Device Net fault.

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

StrtrDN IdlState

This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 29 defines how the starter will respond when a

DeviceNet network is idle. When set to “1”, hold to last state occurs. When set to “0”, will go to DnIdl Value on DN Idle as determined by Parameter 29.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

StrtrDN IdlValue

This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and

Parameter 28 is set to “0”

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

26

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0

27

GET

BOOL

Starter Protection

1

0

—

0

28

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0

29

GET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0


Last PR Fault

0 = None

1 = Hardware Short Circuit

2 = Software Short Circuit

3 = Motor Overload

4 = Reserved

5 = Phase Loss

6 – 12 = Reserved

13 = Control Power Loss

14 = Control Power Fuse

15 = I/O Short

16 = Reserved

17 = Overtemp

18= Reserved

19 = Phase Imbalance

20 = Reserved

21 = DNet Power Loss

22 = Internal Comm

23-26 = Reserved

27 = MCB EEPROM

28 = Base EEPROM

29 = Reserved

30 = Wrong Base

31 = Wrong CTs

32-100 = Reserved

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

61

GET

UINT

Starter Protection

—

0

100

0

3-13

Warning Status

Parameter Number

Access Rule

This parameter warns the user of a condition, without faulting

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

62

GET

WORD

Starter Protection

—

0

65535

0

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Warning

reserved reserved

Phase Loss reserved reserved

Control Power

IO Warning reserved

Phase Imbalance

DeviceNet reserved reserved reserved

Hardware reserved reserved

3-14

User I/O


Off-to-On Delay

This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported “ON”

On-to-Off Delay

This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported “OFF”

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

In Sink/Source

This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source.

0=Sink

1=Source

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Misc. Group

Keypad Mode

This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary

0= Maintained

1= Momentary

Keypad Disable

This parameter disables all keypad function except for the

“OFF” and “RESET” buttons

0=Not Disabled

1=Disabled

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

31

GET/SET

UINT

User I/O ms

0

65.000

0

30

GET/SET

UINT

User I/O ms

0

65.000

0

32

GET/SET

BOOL

User I/

—

0

1

0

46

GET/SET

BOOL

Misc.

—

0

1

0

45

GET/SET

BOOL

Misc.

—

0

1

0

Set to Defaults


This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults

0=No Operation

1=Set to Defaults

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

47

GET/SET

BOOL

Misc.

—

0

1

0

3-15

Base Enclosure

Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating

Bit 0 = IP67

Bit 1 = Nema 4X

Bit 2 = SIL3/CAT4

Bit 3-15 = Reserved

Base Options

Indicates the options for the

ArmorStart Base unit

Bit 0 = Reserved

Bit 1 = Reserved

Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect

Bits 3-7 = Reserved

Bit 8 = 10A Base

Bit 9 = 25A Base

Bit 10-15 = Reserved

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

57

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

65535

0

56

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

65535

0

Wiring Options

Bit 0 = Conduit

Bit 1 = Round Media

Bits 2-15 = 28xG

Bits 3-15 = Reserved

Starter Enclosure

Bit 0 = IP67

Bit 1 = NEMA 4x

Bit 2 = SIL3/CAT4

Bits 3-15 reserved

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

59

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

65535

—

58

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

65535

0

3-16


ZIP Parameters

Starter Option

Bit 0 = HOA Keypad

Bit 1 = Safety Monitor

Bit 2 = Source Brake


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

AutoRun Zip

Enables ZIP data production on power up

0=Disable

1=Enable

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone Produced EPR

The Expected Packet Rate in msec. Defines the rate at which

ZIP data is produced. Defaults to

75 msec.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone Produced PIT

The Production Inhibit Time in msec. Defines the minimum time between Change of State data production

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #1 MAC ID

The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 1

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

60

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

66535

—

67

Get/Set

BOOL

ZIP Parameters

0

1

0

68

GET/SET

UINT

Zip Parameter msec

0

65535

75

69

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters msec

0

65535

75

70

GET/SET

USINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

64

64

Zone #2 MAC ID



Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

71

GET/SET

USINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

64

64

3-17

Zone #3 MAC ID


Zone #4 MAC ID


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

72

GET/SET

USINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

64

64

73

GET/SET

USINT

Misc. Option

—

0

64

64

Zone #1 Health

Read Only consumed connection status for zone 1

0 = Healthy

1 = Unhealthy

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #2 Health


0 = Healthy

1 = Unhealthy

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

74

GET

BOOL

ZIP Parameters

—

0

1

0

75

GET

BOOL

ZIP Parameters

—

0

1

0

3-18


Zone #3 Health


0 = Healthy

1 = Unhealthy

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #4 Health


0 = Healthy

1 = Unhealthy

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #1 Mask

Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 1. Each bit represents a byte in consumed data up to 8 bytes in length. If a mask bit is set, the corresponding consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #2 Mask


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #3 Mask


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

79

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

0

80

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

0

76

GET

BOOL

ZIP Parameters

—

0

1

0

77

GET

BOOL

ZIP Parameters

—

0

1

0

78

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

0


Zone #4 Mask


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

81

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

0

3-19

Zone #1 Offset

The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen consumed data bytes for zone 1.

Zone #2 Offset


Zone #3 Offset


Zone #4 Offset


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

84

GET/SET

UNIT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

1

0

85

GET/SET

UNIT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

1

0

82

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters

7

0

—

0

83

GET/SET

UNIT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

7

0

3-20


Zone #1 EPR

The Expected Packet Rate in msec. for the zone 1 consuming connection. If consumed data is not received in 4 times this value, the zone connection will time out and “Zone #1 Health” will report 1 = Not Healthy.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #2 EPR


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #3 EPR


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #4 EPR


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

86

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters msec

0

65535

75

87

GET/SET

UNIT

ZIP Parameters msec

0

65535

75

88

GET/SET

UNIT

ZIP Parameters msec

0

65535

75

89

GET/SET

UNIT

ZIP Parameters msec

0

65535

75


Zone #1 Control

Zone 1 Control Word. Default

Bit 0 and Bit 1 set, all other bits clear.

Bit0=Security Enable 1=Enable data security

Bit1=COS Cnxn 1=Consume

DNet Group 2 COS messages

Bit2=Poll Cnxn

1=Consume DNet Group 2 Poll

Response msgs.

Bit3=Strobe Cnxn

1=Consume DNet Group 2

Strobe Response msgs.

Bit4=Multicast Poll

1=Consume Multicast Poll

Response messages.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

90

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

3

3-21

Zone #2 Control






Bit2=Poll Cnxn


Response msgs.

Bit3=Strobe Cnxn



Bit4=Multicast Poll


Response messages

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #3 Control






Bit2=Poll Cnxn


Response msgs.

Bit3=Strobe Cnxn



Bit4=Multicast Poll


Response messages

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

91

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

3

92

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

3

3-22


Zone #4 Control






Bit2=Poll Cnxn


Response msgs.

Bit3=Strobe Cnxn



Bit4=Multicast Poll


Response messages

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #1 Key

When the “Security Enable” bit for zone 1 is enabled, this value must match the value of the

Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 1.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Zone #2 Key



Zone #3 Key



Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

93

GET/SET

BYTE

ZIP Parameters

—

0

255

3

94

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

65535

0

95

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

65535

0

96

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

65535

0

Starter Display

Zone #4 KEY


Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 4


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

97

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

65535

0

3-23

Device Value Key

This value is produced in the last

2 bytes of data when one of the

ZIP assemblies is chosen for data production.

Zone Ctrl Enable

Global enable for ZIP peer-topeer messaging. This parameter must be disabled before any changes to the ZIP configuration for the device can be made.

0=Disable

1=Enable

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

MinimumValue

Maximum Value

Default Value

98

GET/SET

UINT

ZIP Parameters

—

0

65535

0

99

GET/SET

BOOL

ZIP Parameters

1

0

—

0

Phase A Current

This parameter provides the current of Phase A measured n increments of 1/10 th

of an ampere

Phase B Current

This parameter provides the current of Phase B measured in increments of 1/10 th

of an ampere

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

101

GET/SET

INT

Starter Display xx.x Amps

0

32767

0

102

GET/SET

INT


0

32767

0

3-24

Starter Setup


Phase C Current

This parameter provides the current of Phase C measured in increments of 1/10 th

of an ampere

Average Current

This parameter provides the average current measured in increments of 1/10 th

of an ampere

% Therm Utilized

This parameter displays the

% Thermal Capacity used

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

FLA Setting

The motor’s full load current rating is programmed in this parameter

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

106

GET/SET

INT

Starter Setup xx.x Amps

See Table 3.2

See Table 3.2

See Table 3.2

Table 3.2 FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values (with indicated setting precision)

FLA Current Range (A)

Default Value

Minimum Value

0.5

1.1

3.2

Maximum Value

2.5

5.5

16.0

0.5

1.1

3.2

103

GET/SET

INT


0

32767

0

104

GET/SET

INT


0

32767

0

105

GET/SET

USINT

Starter Display

% FLA

0

100

0

Overload Class

This parameter allows the installer to select the overload class

1= Overload Class 10




Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

107

GET/SET

USINT

Starter Setup xx.x Amps

1

3

1

3-25

OL Reset Level

This parameter allows the installer select the % Thermal

Capacity which an overload can be cleared

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

108

GET/SET

USINT

Starter Setup

% FLA

0

100

75

3-26

Notes


1

Parameter Programming

Chapter

4

Bulletin 284G Programmable Parameters for

Sensorless Vector Controllers

This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function for

Bulletin 284G Sensorless Vector Controllers.

Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type.

Refer to Chapter 5, DeviceNet™ Commissioning, for instructions in using

RSNetworx

™ for DeviceNet™ to modify parameter settings.

Important: Resetting the Factory Default Values Parameter 47, Set to

Defaults, allows the installer to reset all parameter to the factory default values. It also resets the MAC ID to its factory default after DeviceNet Power is cycled if switches are set >63.

Important: Parameter setting changes downloaded to the ArmorStart® take effect immediately, even during a running status.

Important: Parameter setting changes made in a configuration tool such as

RSNetworx for DeviceNet do not take effect in the ArmorStart until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device.

4-2

Bulletin 284G Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers

Parameter Group Listing

The Bulletin 284G ArmorStart contains ten parameter groups. The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix™, DeviceNet , Starter

Protection , User I/O , Misc. Parameter , Drive DeviceNet , Display

Group, ZIP Parameters, Basic Program, and Advanced Program will be discussed in this chapter.

Table 4.1 Paramerer Group Listing

DeviceLogix

1 Hdw Inputs

2 Network Inputs

3 Network Outputs

4 Trip Status

5 Starter Status

6 DNet Status

7 Starter Command

8 Network Override

9 Comm Override

Display Group

101 Output Freq

102 Commanded Freq

103 Output Current

104 Output Voltage

105 DC Bus Voltage

106 Drive Status

107 Fault 1 Code



110 Process Display

112 Control Source

113 Contrl In Status

114 Dig In Status

115 Comm Status

116 Control SW Ver

117 Drive Type

118 Elapsed Run Time

119 Testpoint Data

120 Analog In 0…10V

121 Analog In 4…20 mA

122 Output Power

123 Output Power Fctr

124 Drive Temp

125 Counter Status

126 Timer Status

127 Timer Stat Fract

128 Stp Logic Status

129 Torque Current

DeviceNet

10 Autobaud Enable

11 Consumed IO Assy

12 Produced IO Assy

13 Prod Assy Word 0

14 Prod Assy Word 1

15 Prod Assy Word 2

16 Prod Assy Word 3

17 Consumed IO Size

18 Produced IO Size

19 Starter COS Mask

20 Net Out COS Mask

21 DNet Voltage

ZIP Parameters

67 AutoRun Zip

68 Zone Produced EPR

69 Zone Produced PIT

70 Zone #1 MacId

71 Zone #2 MacId

72 Zone #3 MacId

73 Zone #4 MacId

74 Zone #1 Health

75 Zone #2 Health

76 Zone #3 Health

77 Zone #4 Health

78 Zone #1 Mask

79 Zone #2 Mask

80 Zone #3 Mask

81 Zone #4 Mask

82 Zone #1 Offset

83 Zone #2 Offset

84 Zone #3 Offset

85 Zone #4 Offset

86 Zone #1 EPR

87 Zone #2 EPR

88 Zone #3 EPR

89 Zone #4 EPR

90 Zone #1 Control

91 Zone #2 Control

92 Zone #3 Control

93 Zone #4 Control

94 Zone #1 Key

95 Zone #2 Key

96 Zone #3 Key

97 Zone #4 Key

98 Device Value Key

99 Zone Ctrl Enable

Starter Protection

22 Breaker Type

23 PrFltResetMode

24 Pr Fault Enable

25 Pr Fault Reset

26 StrtrDN FltState

27 StrtrDN FltValue

28 StrtrDN IdlState

29 StrtrDN IdlValue

61 LAST Pr Fault

62 Warning Status

Basic Program

131 Motor NP Volts

132 Motor NP Hertz

133 Motor OL Current

134 Minimum Freq

135 Maximum Freq

136 Start Source

137 Stop Mode

138 Speed Reference

139 Accel Time 1

140 Decel Time 1

141 Reset To Defalts

142 Reserved

143 Motor OL Ret

User I/O

30 Off-to-On Delay

31 On-to-Off Delay

32 In Sink/Source

151 Digital In1 Sel




155 Relay Out Sel

156 Relay Out Level

157 Relay Out LevelF

158 Opto Out1 Sel

159 Opto Out1 Level

160 Opto Out1 LevelF

161 Opto Out2 Sel

162 Opto Out2 Level

163 DB Threshold

164 Opto Out Logic

165 Analog Out Sel

166 Analog Out High

167 Accel Time 2

168 Decel Time 2

169 Internal Freq

170 Preset Freq 0








178 Jog Frequency

179 Jog Accel/Decel

180 DC Brake Time

181 DC Brake Level

182 DB Resistor Sel

183 S Curve %

184 Boost Select

185 Start Boost

186 Break Voltage

187 Break Frequency

188 Maximum Voltage

Miscellaneous

45 Keypad Mode

46 Keypad Disable

47 Set To Defaults

56 Base Enclosure

57 Base Options

58 Wiring Options

59 Starter Enclosure

60 Starter Options

Drive DeviceNet

48 Drive Control

49 Drvin PrFltState

50 Drvin PrFltValue

51 Drvin DNFltState

52 Drvin DNFltValue

53 Drvin DNFltState

54 Drvin DNFltValue

55 High Speed Enable

Advanced Program

189 Current Limit 1

190 Motor OL Select

191 PWM Frequency

192 Auto Rstrt Tries

193 Auto Rstrt Delay

194 Start At PowerUp

195 Reverse Disable

196 Flying Start En

197 Compensation

198 SW Current Trip

199 Process Factor

200 Fault Clear

201 Program Lock

202 Testpoint Sel

203 Comm Data Rate

204 Comm Node Addr

205 Comm Loss Action

206 Comm Loss Time

207 Comm Format

208 Language

209 Anlg Out Setpt

210 Anlg In 0…10V Lo

211 Anlg In 0…10V Hi

212 Anlg In 4…20 mA Lo

213 Anlg In4…20 mA Hi

214 Slip Hertz @ FLA

215 Process Time Lo

216 Process Time Hi

217 Bus Reg Mode

218 Current Limit 2

219 Skip Frequency

220 Skip Freq Band

221 Stall Fault Time

222 Analog In Loss

223 10V Bipolar Enbl

224 Var PWM Disable

225 Torque Perf Mode

226 Motor NP FLA

227 Autotune

228 IR Voltage Drop

229 Flux Current Ref

230 PID Trim Hi

231 PID Trim Lo

232 PID Ref Sel

233 PID Feedback Sel

234 PID Prop Gain

235 PID Integ Time

236 PID Diff Rate

237 PID Setpoint

238 PID Deadband

239 PID Preload

240 Stp Logic 0

241 Stp Logic 1

242 Stp Logic 2

243 Stp Logic 3

244 Stp Logic 4

245 Stp Logic 5

246 Stp Logic 6

247 Stp Logic 7

248 Reserved

249 Reserved

250 Stp Logic Time 0








258 Reserved

259 Reserved

260 EM Brk Off Delay

261 EM Brk On Delay

262 MOP Reset Sel

.

DeviceLogix Group


This parameter is not available with the Bulletin 284A.

Hdw Inputs

This parameter provides status of hardware inputs.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

1

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

15

0

5

—

—

—

—

—

X

4

—

—

—

—

X

—

Network Inputs

This parameter provides status of network inputs.

3

—

—

—

X

—

—

Bit

2

—

—

X

—

—

—

1

—

X

—

—

—

—

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

0

X

—

—

—

—

—

14

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

13

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

2

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

65535

0

Function

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Function

Net Input 0

Net Input 1

Net input 2

Net Input 3

Net Input 4

Net Input 5

Net Input 6

Net Input 7

Net Input 8

Net Input 9

Net Input 10

Net Input 11

Net Input 12

Net Input 13

Net Input 14

Net Input 15

4-3

4-4


Network Outputs

This parameter provides status of network outputs.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

3

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

32767

0

13

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

14

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

Function

Net Output 0

Net Output 1

Net Output 2

Net Output 3

Net Output 4

Net Output 5

Net Output 6

Net Output 7

Net Output 8

Net Output 9

Net Output 10

Net Output 11

Net Output 12

Net Output 13

Net Output 14


4-5

Trip Status

This parameter provides trip identification.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

14

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

13

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

8

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

➊ Indicates DB1 Comm Fault for Bulletin 284G.

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

4

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

65535

0

Function

Short Circuit

Overload

Phase Short

Ground Fault

Stall

Control Power

IO Fault

Overtemperature

Over Current

Dnet Power Loss

Internal Comm

➊

DC Bus Fault

EEprom

HW Fault

Restart Retries

Misc. Fault

4-6


Starter Status

This parameter provides the status of the starter.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

14

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

13

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

➊ Refers to Control Brake contactor status.

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

5

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

65535

0

Function

Tripped

Warning

Running Fwd

Running Rev

Ready

Net Ctl Status

Net Ref Status

At Reference

DrvOpto1

DrvOpto2

Keypad Jog

Keypad Hand

HOA Status

140M On

Contactor 1

➊

Reserved


Dnet Status

This parameter provides status of the DeviceNet connection.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

14

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

13

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

6

GET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

31

0

Function

Exp Cnxn

IO Cnxn

Exp Flt

IO Flt

IO Idle

Reserved

ZIP 1 Cnxn

ZIP 1 Flt

ZIP 2 Cnxn

ZIP 2 Flt

ZIP 3 Cnxn

ZIP 3 Flt

ZIP 4 Cnxn

ZIP 4 Flt

Starter Command

This parameter provides the command the starter.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

7

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

4

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

7

GET/SET

WORD

DeviceLogix

—

0

255

0

Function

Run Fwd

Run Rev

Fault Reset

Jog Fwd

Jog Rev

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

4-7

4-8

Network Override

This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Comm Override

This parameter allows for local logic to override a loss of an I/O connection.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

DeviceNet Group

Autobaud Enable

When this parameter is enabled, the device will attempt to determine the network baud rate and set its baud rate to the same, provided network traffic exists. At least one node with an established baud rate must exist on the network for autobaud to occur.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Consumed I/O Assy

This parameter selects the format of the I/O data consumed

Produced I/O Assy

This parameter selects the format of the I/O data produced.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

10

GET/SET

BOOL

DeviceNet

1

1

—

0

11

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

188

164

12

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

190

165

8

GET/SET

BOOL

DeviceLogix

—

0

1

0

9

GET/SET

BOOL

DeviceLogix

1

0

—

0


This parameter is used to build bytes 0-1 for produced assembly 120.

Produced Assy Word 1

This parameter is used to build bytes 2-3 for produced assembly 120




Consumer I/O Size

This parameter maps to the Scanner Tx Size.



Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

15

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

262

5

16

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

262

6

13

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

262

1

14

GET/SET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

262

4

17

GET

USINT

DeviceNet

8

4

—

0

4-9

4-10

Produced I/O Size


This parameter maps to the Scanners Rx Size.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Starter COS Mask

This parameter allows the installer to define the change-of-state conditions that will result in a change-of-state message being produced.

13

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

1 0

— X

X —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

18

GET

USINT

DeviceNet

—

0

8

4

19

GET/SET

WORD

DeviceNet

—

0

16383

16383

Function

Tripped

Warning

Running Fwd

Running Rev

Ready

Net Ctl Status

140M On

At Reference

User Input 0

User Input 1

User Input 2

User Input 3

User Input 4

User Input 5


4-11

Net Out COS Mask

This parameter sets the bit that will trigger a COS message on the network output.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

13

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

14

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

12

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Dnet Voltage

This parameter provides the voltage measurement for the DeviceNet network.

5

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

4

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

20

GET/SET

WORD

DeviceNet

—

0

32767

0

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

21

GET

UINT

DeviceNet

V

0

6500

0

Function

Net Output 0

Net Output 1

Net Output 2

Net Output 3

Net Output 4

Net Output 5

Net Output 6

Net Output 7

Net Output 8

Net Output 9

Net Output 10

Net Output 11

Net Output 12

Net Output 13

Net Output 14

4-12


Starter Protection Group

Breaker Type

This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this product.

0 = 140M-D8N-C10

1 = 140M-D8N-C25

PrFlt Reset Mode

This parameter is the Protection Fault reset mode.

0 = Manual

1 = Automatic

Pr Fault Enable

This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

14

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

13

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

11

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit

7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

22

GET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

—

23

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

1

0

—

0

24

GET/SET

WORD

Starter Protection

—

0

65535

64927

Function

Short Circuit

Overload

Phase Short

Ground Fault

Stall

Control Power

IO Fault

Overtemperature

Over Current

Dnet Power Loss

Internal Comm

DC Bus Fault

EEprom

HW Fault

Restart Retries

Misc. Fault

Pr Fault Reset


This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 > 1.

StrtrDN FltState

This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs. When set to 1, hold to last state occurs.

When set to 0, will go to DnFlt Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 27.

StrtrDN FltValue

This parameter determines if the starter will be commanded in the event of a

DevceNet fault.

0 = OFF

1 = ON

StrtrDN IdlState

This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 29 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle. When set to 1, hold to last state occurs. When set to 0, will go to DnFlt Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 29.

0 = Go to Idle Value

1 = Hold Last State


This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 is set to 0.

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

27

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

1

0

—

0

28

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0

25

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

1

0

—

0

26

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

—

0

1

0

29

GET/SET

BOOL

Starter Protection

1

0

—

0

4-13

4-14


Last PR Fault

1 =Hdw Short Ckt

2 = Reserved

3 =Motor Overload (PF Fault Code 7)

4 =Drive Overload (PF Fault Code 64)

5 = Phase U to Gnd (PF Fault Code 38)

6 = Phase V to Gnd (PF Fault Code 39)

7 = Phase W to Gnd (PF Fault Code 40)

8 = Phase UV Short (PF4 Fault Code 41)

9 = Phase UW Short (PF Fault Code 42)

10 = Phase VW Short (PF Fault Code 43)

11 = Ground Fault (PF Fault Code 13)

12 = Stall (PF Fault Code 6)

13 = Control Pwr Loss

14 = Control Pwr Fuse

15 = Input Short

16 = Output Fuse

17 = Over Temp

18 = Heatsink OvrTmp (PF Fault Code 8)

19 = HW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 12)

20 = SW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 63)

21 = DNet Power Loss

22 = Internal Comm

23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81)

24 = Power Loss (PF Fault Code 3)

25 = Under Voltage (PF Fault Code 4)

26 = Over Voltage (PF Fault Code 5)

27 = MCB EEPROM

28 = Base EEPROM

29 =Drive EEPROM (PF Fault Code 100)

30 = Wrong Base

31 = Fan RPM

32 = Power Unit (PF Fault Code 70)

33 = Drive IO Brd (PF Fault Code122)

34 = Restart Retries (PF Fault Code 33)

35 = Drive Aux In Flt (PF Fault Code 2)

36 = Analog Input (PF Fault Code 29)

37 = Drv Param Reset (PF Fault Code 48)

38 = SCV Autotune (PF Fault Code 80)

39 = Source Brake

40 = Reserved

41 = DB1 Comm

42 = DB1 Fault

43 = DB Switch Short

Warning Status

This parameter warns the user of a condition, without faulting

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Group

Units

61

GET

UINT

Starter Protection

—

0

45

0

62

GET

WORD

Starter Protection

—

0

65535

0


User I/O Group

Off-to-On Delay

This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported

ON.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

On-to-Off Delay

This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported

OFF.

In Sink/Source

This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source.

0 = Sink

1 = Source

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

1

0

—

0

32

GET/SET

BOOL

User I/O

30

GET/SET

UINT

User I/O ms

0

65.000

0

31

GET/SET

UINT

User I/O ms

0

65.000

0

4-15

4-16


Miscellaneous Group

Keypad Mode

This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary.

0 = Maintained

1 = Momentary

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Keypad Disable

This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons.

0 = Not Disabled

1 = Disabled

Set to Defaults

This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults.

0 = No Operation

1 = Set to Defaults

Base Enclosure

Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating

0 = IP67

1 = Nema 4X

2 = SIL3/CAT4

3-15 = Reserved

Base Options

Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit

Bit 0 = Reserved

Bit 1 = Reserved


Bits 3-7 = Reserved

Bit 8 = 10A Base

Bit 9 = 25A Base


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

47

GET/SET

BOOL

Misc.

1

0

—

0

46

GET/SET

BOOL

Misc.

1

0

—

0

57

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

15

56

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

15

0

0

45

GET/SET

BOOL

Misc.

1

0

—

0

Wiring Options

Bit 0 = Conduit

Bit 1 = Round Media

Bits 2 = 28xG


Starter Enclosure

Bit 0 = IP67

Bit 1 = NEMA 4x

Bit 2 = SIL3/CAT4

Bits 3-15 reserved

Starter Option

Bit 0 = Reserved

Bit 1 = Reserved

Bit 2 = Reserved

Bit 3 = Control Brake

Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake

Bit 5 = Reserved

Bit 6 = Reserved

Bit 7 = Reserved



Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

60

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

66535

59

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

15

0

58

GET

WORD

Misc.

—

0

15

0

0

4-17

4-18


Drive DeviceNet Group

Drive Control

This parameter provides the status of drive parameters.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

48

GET

WORD

Drive DeviceNet

—

0

4095

0

Drvin PrFltState

Bit

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

— — — — — — — — — — — X

— — — — — — — — — — X —

— — — — — — — — — X — —

— — — — — — — — X — — —

— — — — — — — X — — — —

— — — — — — X — — — — —

— — — — — X — — — — — —

— — — — X — — — — — — —

— — — X — — — — — — — —

— — X

— X —

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X — — — — — — — — — — —

Function

Accel 1 En

Accel 2 En

Decel 1 En

Decel 3 En

Freq Sel 0

Freq Sel 1

Freq Sel 2

Reserved

Drv In 1

Drv In 2

Drv In 3

Drv In 4

This parameter, in conjunction with Parameter 50, defines how the Drive Digital

Inputs 1…4 will respond when a protection trip occurs. When set to 1, Drive Digital

Inputs 1…4 continue to operate as command via the network. When set to 0, Drive

Digital Inputs 1…4 will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 50.

0 = Go to PrFlt Value

1 = Ignore PrFlt

Drvin PrFltValue

This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1…4, assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 49 is set to 0.

0 = Open

1 = Close

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

49

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

—

0

1

0

50

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

—

0

1

0

Drvin DNFltState


Inputs 1…4 will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs. When set to 1, Drive

Digital Inputs 1…4 hold to last state occurs. When set to 0, will go to DnFlt Value on

DN faults as determined by Parameter 52.

0 = Go to Fault Value

1 = Hold Last State

Drvin DNFlt Value

This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 when a DeviceNet

Fault occurs and Parameter 51 is set to 0.

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Drvin DNIdlState


Input 1…4 will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle. When set to 1, hold to last state occurs. When set to 0, will go to DnFlt Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 54.

0 = Go to Fault Value

1 = Hold Last State


This parameter determines the state that Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 assume when the network is idle and Parameter 53 is set to 0.

0 = OFF

1 = ON

High Speed En

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

53

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

1

0

—

0

54

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

1

0

—

0

51

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

—

0

1

0

52

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

1

0

—

0

55

GET/SET

BOOL

Drive DeviceNet

1

0

—

0

4-19

4-20


Display Group

Output Freq

Output frequency present at T1, T2, T3.

Commanded Freq

Value of the active frequency command. Displays the commanded frequency even if the drive is not running.

Output Current

Output Current present at T1, T2, T3.

Output Voltage

Output Current present at T1, T2, T3.

DC Bus Voltage

Present DC Bus voltage level.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

101

102, 110, 134, 135, 138

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.1 Hz

0.0

400.0 Hz

Read Only

102

101, 113, 134, 135, 138

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.1 Hz

0.0

400.0 Hz

Read Only

103

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.01

0.00

Drive rated amps x 2

Read Only

104

131, 184, 188

GET

UINT

Display Group

1V AC

0

230V, 460V, or 600V AC

Read Only

105

GET

UINT

Display Group

1V DC

Based on Drive Rating

Read Only

Drive Status

Present operating condition of the drive.

Bit 0 = running

Bit 1 = Forward

Bit 2 = Accelerating

Bit 3 = Decelerating

Fault 1 Code

A code that represents drive fault. The code will appear in this parameter as the most recent fault that has occurred.

Fault 2 Code

A code that represents a drive fault. The code will appear in this parameter as the second most recent fault that has occurred.

Fault 3 Code

A code that represents a drive fault. The code will appear in this parameter as the third most recent fault that has occurred.

Process Display


Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

106

195

GET

Byte

Display Group

—

0

1

Read Only

4-21

The output frequency scaled by the process factor (Parameter 199).

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

109

GET

UINT

Display Group

—

F122

F2

Read Only

110

101. 199

GET

LINT

Display Group

0.01…1

0.00

9999

Read Only

107

GET

UINT

Display Group

—

F122

F2

Read Only

108

GET

UINT

Display Group

—

F122

F2

Read Only

4-22


Parameter Number

Control Source

Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed Reference.

Valid Start Commands for the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart are the following:

2 = 2-wire

3 = 2-wire Level Sensitive

4 = 2-wire High Speed

5 = RS485 (DSI) Port

9 = Jog

Valid Speed Commands for the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart are the following:

1 = Internal Frequency

2 = 0…10V Input/Remote Potentiometer

4 = Preset Freq X

5 = RS485 (DSI) port

6 = Step Logic Control

9 = Jog Freq

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Contrl In Status

Status of the control terminal block control inputs:

Bit 0 = Start/Run FWD input

Bit 1 = Direction/Run REV Input

Bit 2 = Stop Input

Bit 3 = Dynamic Brake Transistor On

Dig In Status

Status of the control terminal block digital inputs:

Bit 0 = Digital IN 1 Sel




Comm Status

Status of communications ports:

Bit 0 = Receiving Data

Bit 1 = Transmitting Data

Bit 2 = RS485

Bit 3 = Communication Error

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

112

136, 138, 151…154 (Digital

Inx Sel) must be set to 4, 169,

170…177 (Preset Freq X),

240…247 (Step Logic

Control)

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

0

9

5

113

102, 134, 135

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

0

1

0

114

151…154

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

0

1

0

115

203…207

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

0

1

0

Control SW Ver

Main Control Board software version for AC Drive.

Drive Type

Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.

Elapsed Run Time

Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Time is displayed in 10 hour increments.

Testpoint Data

The present value of the function selected in Parameter 202.

Analog In 0…10V


The percent value of the voltage at I/O terminal 13 (100% = 10V).

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

118

GET

UINT

Display Group

1 = 10 hrs

0

9999

Read Only

119

202

GET

UINT

Display Group

1 Hex

0

FFFF

Read Only

116

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.01

1.00

99.99

Read Only

117

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

1001

9999

Read Only

120

210, 211

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.1%

0.0%

100.0%

Read Only

4-23

Analog In 4…20 mA

This parameter is not available for use with the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controller.

Parameter Number 121

4-24

Output Power

The output power present at T1, T2, and T3.

Output Power Fctr


The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and current.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Drive Temp

Present operating temperature of the drive power section.

Counter Status

The current value of the counter when counter is enabled.

Timer Status

The current value of the timer when timer is enabled.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

124

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

°C

0

120

Read Only

125

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

0

9999

Read Only

126

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.1 sec

0

9999

Read Only

122

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.00

Drive rated power X 2

Read Only

123

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.1

°

0.0

°

180.0

°

Read Only

Stp Logic Status

When Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is set to 6 Stp Logic, this parameter will display the current step of step logic as defined by Parameters 240…247 (Stp

Logic X).


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

128

GET

UINT

Display Group

1

0

8

Read Only

4-25

Torque Current

The current value of the motor torque current.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

129

GET

UINT

Display Group

0.01

0.00

Drive Rated Amps x 2

Read Only

Basic Program Group

Motor NP Volts

Stop drive before changing this parameter.

Set to the motor name plate rated volts.

Motor NP Hertz

Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.


Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

131

104, 184, 185…187

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

1V AC

20

240V, 460V, or 600V AC


132

184, 185…187, and 190

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

1 Hz

15

400

60 Hz

4-26

Motor OL Current

Set to the maximum allowable current. The drive fault on an F7 Motor Over load if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150% for 60 seconds.

Minimum Freq

Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously.

Maximum Freq


Sets the Highest frequency the drive will output continuously.

Start Source



Sets the control scheme used to start the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart.

2 = 2-wire

3 = 2-wire Level Sensitive

4 = 2-wire High Speed

5 = RS485 (DSI) Port

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

133

155, 158, 161, 189, 190, 198,

214, 218

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

0.1 A

0.0



134

101, 102, 113, 135, 185, 186,

187, 210, 212

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

0.1 Hz

0.0

400

0.0

135

101, 102, 113, 134, 135, 178,

185, 186, 187, 211, 213

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

0.1 Hz

0.0

400

60.0

136

112 and 137

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

—

0

5

5


Stop Mode

Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart are the following:

0 = Ramp, CF Ramp to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.

1 = Coast, CF Coast to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.

2 = DC Brake,CF DC Injection Braking Stop. Stop command clears active fault.

3 = DCBrkAuto, CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff.

Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) or

Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped. Stop command clears active fault

4 = Ramp Ramp to Stop

5 = Coast Coast to Stop

6 = DC Brake DC Injection Braking Stop

7 = DC BrakeAuto DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff.

Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) or

Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded

8 = Ramp + EM B, CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop command clears active fault.

9 = Ramp + EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value 9

4-27

137

136, 180, 181, 182, 205, 260,

261

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

—

0

9

Speed Reference

Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart are the following:

1 = Internal Freq

2 = 0…10V Input

4 = Preset Freq

5 = Comm port

6 = Stp Logic

9 = Jog Freq

Note: Option 2 must be selected when using 0…10V Analog Input.

Accel Time 1

Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.

Maximum Freq

Accel Time

= Accel Rate

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

138

101, 102, 112, 139, 140, 151,

152, 153, 154, 169,

170…173, 174…177, 210,

211, 213, 232, 240…247, and 250…257

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

—

0

7

5

139

138, 140, 151, 152, 153, 154,

167, 170…173, 174…177, and 240…247

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

0.1 sec

0.0 sec

600.0 sec

10.0 sec

4-28

Decel Time 1

Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.

Maximum Freq

Decel Time

Reset To Defaults

=


Decel Rate


Resets all parameter values to factory defaults.

0 = Ready/Idle (Default)

1 = Factory Rset

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Motor OL Ret

Enables/disables the Motor overload Retention function. When Enabled, the value held in the motor overload counter is saved at power-down and restored at powerup. A change to this parameter setting resets the counter.

0 = Disabled (Default)

1 = Enabled

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Advanced Program Group

151 (Digital In 1 SEL)





Selects the function for the digital inputs.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

140

138, 139, 151, 152, 153, 154,

168, 170…173, 174…177, and 240…247

GET/SET

UINT

Basic Program

0.1 sec

0.1 sec

600.0 sec

10.0 sec

141

GET/SET

BOOL

Basic Program Group

—

1

1

0

143

GET/SET

BOOL

Basic Program Group

—

0

1

0

151, 152, 153, 154

112, 114, 138…140, 167,

168, 170…173, 174…177,

178, 179, 240…247

GET/SET

UINT

Advanced Program Group

See Table 4.2 for details


Table 4.2 Digital Inputs Options

4-29

Options

0

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

6

7

10

11

12

13

18

19

20

21

22

14

15

16

17

23

24

25

26

Not Used

Acc & Dec2

Jog

Description

Terminal has no function but can be read over network communication via Parameter 114 (Dig In Status).

• When active, Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2) and Parameter 168 (Decel Time 2) are used for all ramp rates except Jog.

• Can only be tied to one input.

• When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to the value set in Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency).

• When the input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/

Decel).

• A valid Start command will override this input.

When enable, an F2 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed.

Refer to Parameters 170…173 and 174…177.

Aux Fault

Preset Freq

(Parameters 151 and 152 Default)

Local (Parameter

153 Default)

Option not valid for Bulletin 284G ArmorStart.

Comm Port

Clear Fault

This option is the default setting.

When active, clears active fault.

RampStop,CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.

CoastStop,CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.

DCInjStop,CF Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.

Jog Forward

(Parameter 154

Default)

Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes inactive. A valid start will override this command.

Jog Reverse

10V In Ctrl

Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes inactive. A valid start will override this command.

Option with Factory Installed option — A10 (0…10V Analog Input). Selects 0…10V or +/-10V as the frequency reference. Start source is not changed.

20MA In Ctrl

PID Disable

MOP Up

MOP Down


Disabled PID function. Drive uses the next valid non-PID speed reference.

Increases the value of Parameter 169 (internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.

Decreases the value of Parameter 169 (internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.

Timer Start

Counter In

Clears and starts the timer function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs.

Starts the counter function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs.

Reset Timer Clears the active timer.

Reset Countr Clears the active counter.

Rset Tim&Cnt Clear active timer and counter.

Logic In1

Logic Function input number 1. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (see Parameters 155, 158, 161 options 11…14). May be used in conjunction with Step Logic Parameters 240…247 (Stp Logic X).

Logic In2

Logic Function input number 1. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (see Parameters 155, 158, 161 options 11…14). May be used in conjunction with Step Logic Parameters 240…247 (Stp Logic X).

Current Lmt2 When active, Parameter 218 (Current Limit 2) determines the drive current limit level.

Anlg Invert

Inverts the scaling of analog input levels set in parameter 210 (Anlg In 0…10V LO) and parameter 211

(Anlg In 0…10 HI).

4-30


Options

0

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

18

19

20

21

22

8

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

16

17

155 (Relay Out Sel)

Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

155

133, 156, 192, 240…247,

250…257, 260, 261

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

22

22

Table 4.3

Ready/Fault

(Default)

At Frequency

MotorRunning

Reverse

Motor Overld

Ramp Reg

Above Freq

Above Cur

Above DCVolt

Retries Exst

Above Anlg V

Logic In 1

Logic In 2

Logic In 1 & 2

Logic In 1 or 2

StpLogic Out

Timer Out

Counter Out

Above PF Ang

Anlg In Loss

ParamControl

NonRec Fault

EM Brk Cntrl

Description

Relay changes state when power is applied. This indicates the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs.

Drive reached commanded frequency.

Motor is receiving power from drive.

Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.

Motor overload condition exists.

Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decal times to avoid overcurrent or overvoltage fault from occurring.

Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.

Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.

Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.

Value set in Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is exceeded.


An input is programmed as Logic In 1 and is active.


Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.

One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active.

Drive enters Step Logic step with Digit 3 of Command Word (Parameters 240…247).

Timer has reached value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.

Counter has reached value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.

Power factor angle has exceeded the value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.

Analog input loss has occurred. Program parameter 122 (Analog In Los) for desired action when loss occurs

Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 (Relay Out

Level) (0 = Off, 1 = ON).


EM Brake is energized. Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk Off Delay) and Parameter 262 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action.


4-31

Relay Out Level

Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 155 (Relay

Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.

Parameters 155 Setting Parameter 156 Min./Max.

6

7

8

10

16

17

18

20

0/400 Hz

0/180%

0/815V

0/100%

0.1/9999 sec

1/9999 counts

1/180

°

0/1

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

156

155, 158, 161

GET/SET

UINT


0.1

0.0

9999

0.0

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

2

3

4

5

6

158 (Opto Out1 Sel)

161 (Opto Out2 Sel)

Determines the operation of the programmable opto outputs.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Table 4.4

Parameter 158 and 161 Options

Options

0

1

7

158, 161

133, 156, 192, 240…247,

250…257

GET/SET

UINT



Ready/Fault

(Default)

At Frequency

(Parameter 161

Default)

MotorRunning

(Parameter

158Default)

Reverse

Motor Overld

Ramp Reg

Above Freq

Above Cur

Above DCVolt

Retries Exst

Above Anlg V

Logic In 1

Logic In 2

Logic In 1 & 2

Logic In 1 or 2

Description

Opto outputs are active when power is applied. This indicates the drive is ready for operation. Opto outputs are inactive when power is removed or a fault occurs.

Drive reached commanded frequency.

Motor is receiving power from drive.

Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.

Motor overload condition exists.

Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decal times to avoid overcurrent or overvoltage fault from occurring.

Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1 Level) or Parameter 162 (Opto Output 2

Level) Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold.

Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1 Level) or Parameter 162 (Opto Output

2 Level). Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold. Important: Value for Parameter 159 or 162 must entered in percent of the drive rated output current.

Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1 Level). Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold.





Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.

One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active.

4-32


Options

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

StpLogic Out

Timer Out

Counter Out

Above PF Ang

Anlg In Loss

ParamControl

NonRec Fault

Description

Drive enters Step Logic step with Digit 3 of Command Word (Parameters 240…247).

Timer has reached value set in Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1 Level) or Parameter 162 (Opto Output 2 Level). Use

Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold.

Counter has reached value set in Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1 Level) or Parameter 162 (Opto Output 2 Level). Use

Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold.

Power factor angle has exceeded the value set in Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1 Level) or Parameter 162 (Opto

Output 2 Level). Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold.

Analog input loss has occurred. Program parameter 122 (Analog In Los) for desired action when loss occurs

Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 159 (Opto Out 1

Level) or Parameter 162 (Opto Output 2 Level) (0 = Off, 1 = ON).


ATTENTION

Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is not enabled. A nonresettable fault has occurred.

!

EM Brake is energized. Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk Off Delay) and Parameter 262 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action.

EM Brk Cntrl

159 (Opto Out1 Level)

162 (Opto Out2 Level)

Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 158 (Opto

Out1 Sel) or Parameter 161 (Opto Out2 Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.

Parameters 158 and 161

Setting

16

17

18

20

6

7

8

10

Parameters 159 and 161

Min./Max.

0/400 Hz

0/180%

0/815V

0/100%

0.1/9999 sec

1/9999 counts

1/180

°

0/1

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

159 162

GET/SET

UINT


—

0.0

9999

0.0

Opto Out Logic

Determines the logic (Normally Open/N.O. or Normally Closed/N.C.) of the opto outputs.

Option

2

3

0

1

Opto Out1 Logic

N.O. (Normally Open)

N.C. (Normally Closed)



Opto Out2 Logic





Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

164

GET/SET

UINT


1

0

3

0


4-33

Analog Out Sel

Sets the analog output signal (0…10V). The output is used to provide a signal that is proportional to several drives

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Table 4.5 Analog Output Options

Analog Out High

Scales the maximum output value for parameter 165 source setting

165

135, 166

GET/SET

UINT


See Table for details

Options

16

17

18

19

20

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

OutFreq 0…10

OutCurr 0…10

OutVolt 0…10

OutPowr 0…10

TstData 0…10

OutFreq 0…20

OutCurr 0…20

OutVolt 0…20

10

11

8

9

OutPowr 0…20

TstData 0…20

OutFreq 4…20

OutCurr 4…20

12 OutVolt 4…20

13 OutPowr 4…20

14

15

TstData 4…20

OutTorq 0…10

OutTorq 0…20

OutTorq 4…20

Setpnt 0…10

Setpnt 0…20

Setpnt 4…20

Output Range

0…10V

0…10V

0…10V

0…10V

0…10V

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

4…20 mA

4…20 mA

4…20 mA

4…20 mA

4…20 mA

0…10V

0…20 mA

4…20 mA

0…10V

0…20 mA

4…20 mA

Minimum Output

Value

0V = 0 Hz

0V = 0 Amps

0V = 0 Volts

0V = 0 kW

0V = 0000

0 mA = 0 Hz

0 mA = 0 Amps

0 mA = 0 Volts

0 mA = 0 kW

0 mA = 0000

4 mA = 0 Hz

4 mA = 0 Amps

4 mA = 0 Volts

4 mA = 0 kW

4 mA = 0000

0V = 0 Amps

0 mA = 0 Amps

4 mA = 0 Amps

0V = 0%

0 mA = 0%

4 mA = 0%

Maximum Output Value A066

(Analog Out High)

P035 (Maximum Freq)

200% Drive Rated Output Current

120% Drive Rated Output Volts

200% Drive Rated Power

65535 (Hex FFFF)

P035 (Maximum Freq)




65535 (Hex FFFF)

P035 (Maximum Freq)




65535 (Hex FFFF)

200% Drive Rated FLA



100.0% Setpoint Setting



DIP Switch Position

0…10V

0…10V

0…10V

0…10V

0…10V

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…10V

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

0…10V

0…20 mA

0…20 mA

Related

Parameter

104

122

119

129

122

119

101

103

129

129

209

209

209

119

101

103

104

101

103

104

122

Note: Only options 5…14, 16, 17, 19, and 20 are not valid options.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

166

GET/SET

UINT


%

0%

800%

100%

4-34


Accel Time 2

When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog.

Maximum Freq

Accel Time

= Accel Rate

Parameter 135

(Maximum Freq)

Speed

Acceleration

0

0

Param.

139 or

167

(Accel

Time x)

Time

Deceleration

Param.

140 or

168

(Decel

Time x)

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Decel Time 2

When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog.

Maximum Freq

Decel Time

= Decel Rate

Parameter 135

(Maximum Freq)

Speed

Acceleration

0

0

Param.

139 or

167

(Accel

Time x)

Internal Freq

Time

Deceleration

Param.

140 or

168

(Decel

Time x)

Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is set to 1 Internal Freq. When enabled, this parameter will change the frequency command in real time.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

167

139, 151, 152, 153, 154,

170…173, 174…177,

240…247

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.0

600.0

20.0

168

140, 151, 152, 153, 154,

170…173, 174…177,

240…247

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.0

600.0

20.0

169

138, 162

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 Hz

0.0

400.0

60.0


4-35

170 (Preset Freq 0)

➊








Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

170…173, 174…177

138, 139, 140, 151, 152, 152,

153, 167, 168, 240…247,

250…257

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 Hz

0.0

400.0

See Table 4.A

Table 4.A 170…177 Preset Freq Options

Values

Provides a fixed frequency command value when 151…153 (Digital Inx Sel) is set to

4 Preset Frequencies.

Input State of Digital In

1 (I/O Terminal 05 when

Parameter 151 = 4)

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1




1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

.




1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

170 Default

➊

171 Default

172 Default

173 Default

174 Default

175 Default

176 Default

177 Default

Min./Max.

Display

Frequency

Source

170 (Preset Freq 0)

171 (Preset Freq 1)

172 (Preset Freq 2)

173 (Preset Freq 3)

174 (Preset Freq 4)

175 (Preset Freq 5)

176 (Preset Freq 6)

177 (Preset Freq 7)

0.0 Hz

5.0 Hz

10.0 Hz

20.0 Hz

30.0 Hz

40.0 Hz

50.0 Hz

60.0 Hz

0.0/400.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

Accel/Decel

Parameter

Used

➋

(Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)








➊ To activate 170 (Preset Freq 0) set 138 (Speed Reference) to option 4 Preset Freq.

➋ When a Digital Input is set to Accel 2 & Decel 2, and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.

Jog Frequency

Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

178

135, 151, 152, 153, 154, 179

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 Hz

0.0

400.0

10.0

4-36

Jog Accel/Decel


Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued.

DC Brake Time

Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor. Refer to

Parameter 181 DC Brake Level.

DC Brake Level

Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when

Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either Ramp or DC Brake.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

179

178, 151, 152, 153, 154

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.1

600.0

10.0

180

137, 181

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.0

99.9

(Setting of 99.9 = Continuous)

0.0

181

137, 180

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 A

0.0

Drive rated amps X 1.8


ATTENTION

!

• If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used.

• This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.

DB Resistor Sel


Enables/disables external dynamic braking.

Setting Min./Max.

0

1

Disabled

Normal RA Res (5% Duty Cycle)

2 No Protection (100% Duty Cycle)

3…99 x% Duty Cycle Limited (3…99% of Duty Cycle)


Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

4-37

182

137

GET/SET

UINT


1

0

99

0

S Curve %

Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S

Curve. Time is added, half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

183

GET/SET

UINT


1%

0

100

0% disabled

Figure 4.2

Boost Select

Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve. Active when Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0V/Hz Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected.


Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

184

104, 131, 132, 185, 186, 187,

225

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

14

8

4-38


Table 4.6 Boost Select Options

Options

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Figure 4.1

Description

Custom V/Hz

30.0, VT

35.0, VT

40.0, VT

45.0, VT

0.0 no IR

0.0

2.5, CT (Default for 5 Hp/4.0 kW Drive)

5.0, CT Default

7.5,CT

10.0,CT

12.5,CT

15.0,CT

17.5,CT

20.0,CT

Variable Torque (Typical fan/pump curves)

Constant Torque

1/2 (Motor NP Volts)

4

3

2

1

Settings

5...14

0 50

% Parameter 132 (Motor NP Hertz)

100


4-39

Start Boost

Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 (Boost Select) = 0 Custom V/Hz and Parameter

225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0V/Hz.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

185

131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 186,

187, 188, 225

GET/SET

UINT


1.1%

0.0%

25.0%

2.5%

Figure 4.3

Parameter 188 (Maximum Voltage)

Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)

Parameter 187 (Break Frequency)

Parameter 134 (Minimum Freq) Frequency

Parameter 132 (Motor NP Hertz)

Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq)

4-40

Brake Voltage

Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when Parameter 184 (Boost

Select) = 0 Custom V/Hz and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0V/Hz.

Brake Frequency

Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when Parameter 184 (Boost

Select) = 0 Custom V/Hz and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0V/Hz.

Maximum Voltage

Sets the highest voltage the drive will output.

Current Limit 1


Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

186

131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185,

187, 188, 225

GET/SET

UINT


1.1%

0.0%

100.0%

25.0%

187

131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185,

186, 188, 225

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 Hz

0.0 Hz

400.0 Hz

15.0 Hz

188

104, 185, 186, 187

GET/SET

UINT


1V AC

20V AC

Drive Rated Volts

Drive Rated Volts

189

133, 218

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 A

0.1 A




Motor OL Select

Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Setting 0…2 select the derating factor for I

2 t overload function.

0 = No Derate

1 = Min. Derate

2 = Max. Derate

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value


4-41

190

132, 133

GET/SET

UINT


1

0

2

0


PWM Frequency

Sets the carrier frequency the PWM output waveform. The Figure 4.5 provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting.


Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Figure 4.5


191

224

GET/SET

UINT


0.l Hz

2.0 Hz

16.0 Hz

4.0 Hz

4-42


Auto Rstrt Tries

Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

192

155, 158, 161, 193

GET/SET

UINT


1

0

9

0

Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive

1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set Parameter 193 (AutoRstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.

Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive


2. Set Parameter 193 (AutoRstrt Delay) to 0.

ATTENTION

!

Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.

Auto Rstrt Delay

Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to a value other than zero.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

193

192

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.0

300.0 sec

1.0 sec


Start at PowerUp


Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored. Requires a digital input configured Run or Start and a valid start contact.

This parameter will not function if Parameter 136 (Start Source) is set to 4 2-W High

Speed.

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

ATTENTION

!

Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.

Reverse Disable


Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed. The reverse command may come from a digital command or serial command. All reverse inputs including two-wire Run Reverse will be ignored with reverse disabled.

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Flying Start En

Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual

RPM.

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Compensation

Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability

0 = Disabled

1 = Electrical (Default)

Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non-sinusoidal motor currents. This setting attempts to correct this condition

2 = Mechanical

Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator. This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition.

3 = Both

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

194

192

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

1

0

195

106

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

1

0

196

GET/SET

UINT


1

0

—

0

197

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

3

1

4-43

4-44

SW Current Trip

Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip.

Process Factor

Scales the output frequency value displayed by Parameter 110 (Process Display).

Output Freq x Process Factor = Process Display

Fault Clear


Resets a fault and clears the fault queue. Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications.


1 = Reset Fault

2 = Clear Buffer (Parameters 107…109 [Fault x Code])

Program Lock

Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel.

0 = Unlocked

1 = Locked

Testpoint Sel


Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

198

133

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 A

0.0


0.0 (Disabled)

199

110

GET/SET

UINT


0.1

0.1

999.9

30.0

200

GET/SET

UINT


2

0

—

0

201

GET/SET

UINT


1

0

—

0

202

119

GET/SET

UINT


1 Hex

0

FFFF

400


Comm Data Rate

This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor

Controller.


CommNode Addr


Controller.

Comm Loss Action

Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors.

0 = Fault (Default)

Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop

1 = Coast Stop

Stops drive via coast to stop

2 = Stop

Stops via Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) setting

3 = Continu Last

Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM

Comm Loss Time

Sets the time that the drive remain in communication loss before implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).

Parameter Number

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

204

4-45

205

115, 137, 206

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

3

0

206

115, 205

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.1 sec

60.0 sec

15.0 sec

Comm Format


Controller.


Language


Controller.

Anlg Out Setpnt

When parameter 165 (Analog Out Sel) is set to option 18, this sets the percentage of the analog output desired


Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

209

165

GET/SET

UINT


0.1%

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

4-46

Anlg In 0…10V Lo



Sets the analog input level that corresponds to parameter 134 (Minimum Freq) if a

0…10V input is used by parameter 138 (Speed Reference)

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Figure 4.6

Parameter 135

[Maximum Freq]

210

121, 134, 138, 222

GET/SET

UINT


0.1%

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

Speed Reference

Parameter 134

[Minimum Freq]

0

0

Parameter 210

[Anlg In 0-10V Lo]

Parameter 211

[Anlg In 0-10V Hi]

Anlg In 0…10V HI


Sets the analog input level that corresponds to parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) if a

0…10V input is used by parameter 138 (Speed Reference). Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than parameter 210 (Anlg In 0…10V Lo).

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Anlg In4…20MA LO


Controller.

Anlg In4…20 mA HI


Controller.

Parameter Number

Parameter Number

211

121, 135, 138, 222, 223

GET/SET

UINT


0.1%

0.0%

100.0%

0.0%

212

213


Slip Hertz @ FLA

Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current.

Process Time Lo

Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134 (Minimum Freq).

When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110 (Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.

Process Time Hi

Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq).

When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110 (Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.

Bus Reg Mode

Enables the bus regulator.

0 = Disable

1 = Enabled

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

4-47

214

133

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 Hz

0.0 Hz

10.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

215

110, 134

GET/SET

UNIT

Advanced Setup

Hz

0.00

99.99

0.00

216

110, 135

GET/SET

UNIT

Advanced Setup

Hz

0.00

99.99

0.00

217

GET/SET

UNIT

Advanced Setup

—

0

1

1

4-48

Current Limit 2

Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs. This parameter is only active if Parameters 151, 152, 153, and 154 (Digital Inx Sel) is set to 25

Current Lmt2 and is active.

Skip Frequency


Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

218

133, 151, 152, 153, 154, 189

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 A

0.1 A

Drive rated amps x 1.8

Drive rated amps x 1.5

219

220

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 hz

0.0

400.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

Skip Frq Band

Determines the brand width around Parameter 219 (Skip Frequency). Parameter

220 (Skip Frquency) is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency. A setting of 0.0 disables this parameter.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

220

219

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 Hz

0.0 Hz

30.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

Figure 4.7


4-49

Stall Fault Time

Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued.

0 = 60 sec (Default)

1 = 120 sec

2 = 240 sec

3 = 360 sec

4 = 480 sec

5 = Flt Disabled

Analog In Loss

Selects drive action when an input signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as an analog signal less than 1V. The signal loss event ends and normal operation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V. If using a

0…10V analog input, set parameter 210 (Anlg In 0…10V Lo) to a minimum of 20%

(i.e., 2 volts).

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Options

4

5

6

0

1

2

3

Disabled (Default)

Fault (F29)

Stop

Zero Ref

Min Freq Ref

Max Freq Ref

Int Freq Ref

Table 4.7

Description

F29 Analog Input Loss

Uses P037 (Stop Mode)

Drive runs at zero speed reference

Drive runs at minimum frequency

Drive runs at maximum frequency

Drive runs at internal frequency

221

GET/SET

UINT


5

0

—

0

222

210, 211, 232

GET/SET

UINT



10V Bipolar Enbl

Enables/disables bipolar control. In bipolar mode, direction is commanded by the sign of the reference.

Options

0 = Unipolar In (Default) 0…10V only

1 = Bipolar In +/- 10V

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

223

138, 211

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

1

0

4-50

Var PWM Disable


Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by Parameter 191 (PWM Frequency).

0 = Enabled

1 = Disabled

Disabling this feature when low frequency condition exists may result in IGBT stress and nuisance tripping.

Torque Perf Mode


Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation.

0 = V/Hz

1 = Sensrls Vect

Motor NP FLA


Set to the motor nameplate full load amps.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

224

191

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

1

0

225

184, 185, 186, 187, 227

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

1

1

226

227

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 A

0.1


Drive rated amps


4-51

Autotune


Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop) and

Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref), which affect sensorless vector performance.

Parameter 226 (Motor NP FLA) must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure.

Provides an automatic method for setting A128 (IR Voltage Drop) and A129 (Flux

Current Ref), which affect sensorless vector performance. Parameter A126 (Motor

NP FLA) must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the

Autotune procedure.


1 = Static Tune

2 = Rotate Tune

Ready (0) — Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate

Tune.

Static Tune (1) — A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of A128 (IR Voltage

Drop). A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load.

Rotate Tune (2) — A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of A129 (Flux Current Ref). A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

227

225, 226, 228, 229

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

3

0

Important:

Used when motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure.

ATTENTION

!

Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure. To guard against possible injury and/ or equipment damage, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.

If the Autotune routine fails, an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed.

4-52


IR Voltage Drop

Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Flux Current Ref

Value of amps for full motor flux.

PID Trim Hi

Sets the maximum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used.

PID Trim Lo

Sets the minimum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used.

PID Ref Select


Enables/disables PID mode and selects the source of the PID reference. Valid PID

Ref Select for the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart are the following:

0 = PID Disable

1 = PID Setpoint

4 = Comm Port

5 = Setpnt Trim

8 = Comm, Trim

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Related Parameter

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

228

227

GET/SET

UINT


0.1V AC

0.0

230


229

227

GET/SET

UINT


0.01 A

0.00

Motor NP Volts


230

GET/SET

UINT


0.1

0.0

400.0

60.0

231

GET/SET

UINT


0.1

0.0

400.0

0.1

232

138, 222

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

9

0

PID Feedback Sel

Valid PID Feedback Sel command for the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart is the following;

2 = Comm Port

PID Prop Gain

Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled by

Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel).

PID Integ Time

Sets the value for the PID integral component when the PID mode is enabled by

Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel).

PID Diff Rate

Sets the value for the PID differential component when the PID mode is enabled by

Parameter 232 (PID Rel Sel).

PID Setpoint

Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel).


Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

4-53

233

GET/SET

UINT


—

0

2

0

234

GET/SET

UINT


0.01

0.00

99.99

0.01

235

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.0 sec

999.9 sec

0.1 sec

236

GET/SET

UINT


0.01 (1/sec)

0.00 (1/sec)

99.99 (1/sec)

0.01 (1/sec)

237

GET/SET

UINT


0.1%

0.0%

10.0%

0.0%

4-54

PID Deadband


Sets the lower limit of the PID output.

PID Preload

Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.

A240 (Stp Logic 0)









Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Parameters 240…247 are only active if 138 (Speed Reference) is set to 6 Stp Logic.

These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of frequency commands. Each step can be based on time, status of a Logic input, or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input.

Digits 0…3 for each (Stp Logic x) parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile.

A Logic input is established by setting a digital input, Parameters

151…154 (Digital Inx Sel), to 23 Logic In1 and/or 24 Logic In2.

A time interval between steps can be programmed using Parameters

250…257 (Stp Logic Time x). See Table 4.8 for related parameters.

The speed for any step is programmed using Parameters 170…177

(Preset Freq x).

238

GET/SET

UINT


0.1%

0.0%

10.0%

0.0%

239

GET/SET

UINT


0.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

400.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

240…247

GET/SET

UINT


—

0001 baFF

00F1


Table 4.8

4-55

Step Logic Parameter

(Active when 138 = 6 Stp

Logic)

240 (Stp Logic 0)

241 (Stp Logic 1)

242 (Stp Logic 2)

243 (Stp Logic 3)

244 (Stp Logic 4)

245 (Stp Logic 5)

246 (Stp Logic 6)

247 (Stp Logic 7)

Related Preset Frequency

Parameter (Can be activated independent of Step Logic

Parameters)

170 (Preset Freq 0)

171 (Preset Freq 1)

172 (Preset Freq 2)

173 (Preset Freq 3)

174 (Preset Freq 4)

175 (Preset Freq 5)

176 (Preset Freq 6)

177 (Preset Freq 7)

Related Step Logic Time

Parameter (Active when

240…247 Digit 0 or 1 are set to 1, b, C, d, or E)

250 (Stp Logic Time 0)








How Step Logic Works

The step logic sequence begins with a valid start command. A normal sequence always begins with 240 (Stp Logic 0).

Digit 0: Logic For Next Step — This digit defines the logic for the next step. When the condition is met the program advances to the next step. Step 0 follows Step 7. Example: Digit 0 is set 3. When Logic

In2 becomes active, the program advances to the next step.

Digit 1: Logic to Jump to a Different Step — For all settings other than F, when the condition is met, the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the step defined by Digit 2.

Digit 2: Different Step to Jump — When the condition for Digit 1 is met, the Digit 2 setting determines the next step or to end the program.

Digit 3: Step Settings — This digit defines what accel/decel profile the speed command will follow and the direction of the command for the current step. In addition, if a relay or opto output (Parameters 155,

158, and 161) is set to 15 StpLogic Out, this parameter can control the status of that output.

Any Step Logic parameter can be programmed to control a relay or opto output, but you cannot control different outputs based on the condition of different Step Logic commands.

Step Logic Settings

The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each step logic parameter. The following is a listing of the available settings for each digit. Refer to Appendix J for details.

4-56


Table 4.9 Digit 3 Settings

Required

Setting

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

A b

8

9

Table 4.10 Digit 2 Settings

Accel/Decel

Parameter Used

Accel/Decel 1

Accel/Decel 1

Accel/Decel 1

Accel/Decel 1

Accel/Decel 1

Accel/Decel 1

Accel/Decel 2

Accel/Decel 2

Accel/Decel 2

Accel/Decel 2

Accel/Decel 2

Accel/Decel 2

Step Logic

Output State

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Off

On

On

On

C d

E

F

A b

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

8

9

A

Jump to Step 0

Jump to Step 1

Jump to Step 2

Jump to Step 3

Jump to Step 4

Jump to Step 5

Jump to Step 6

Jump to Step 7

End Program (Normal Stop)

End Program (Coast to Stop)

End Program and Fault (F2)

Table 4.11 Digit 1 and Digit 0 Settings

Skip Step (Jump Immediately)

Step Based on (Stp Logic Time x)

Step if Logic In1 is Active

Step if Logic In2 is Active

Step if Logic In1 is Not Active

Step if Logic In12 is Not Active

Stop if either Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active

Stop if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active

Stop if neither Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active

Step if Logic In1 is Active and Logic In2 is Not Active

Step if Logic In2 is Active and Logic In1 is Not Active

Step after (Stp Logic Time x) and Logic In1 is Active

Step after (Stp Logic Time x) and Logic In2 is Active

Step after (Stp Logic Time x) and Logic In1 is Not Active

Step after (Stp Logic Time x) and Logic In2 is Not Active

Do Not Stop/Ignore Digit 2 Settings

Commanded

Direction

FWD

REV

No Output

FWD

REV

No Output

FWD

REV

No Output

FWD

REV

No Output

A250 (Stp Logic Time 0)









Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding StpLogic command is set to Step after Time.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

4-57

250…257

138, 155, 158, 161,

171…177, 240…247

GET/SET

UINT


0.1 sec

0.0 sec

999.9 sec

30.0 sec

EM Brk Off Delay

Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 (Stop

Mode) is set to option 8 or 9.

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

260

137

GET/SET

UNIT

Advanced Setup

0.01 sec

0.01 sec

10 sec

0.0 sec

Frequency

260 [EM Brk Off Delay]

Ramp Accel

Ramp Decel

261 [EM Brk On Delay]

Minimum Freq

Start

Commanded

EM Brk

Energized (Off)

Time

Stop

Commanded

EM Brk On Delay

Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before stopping and deenergizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to option 8 or

9.

EM Brk

De-Energized (On)

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Drive Stops

261

137

GET/SET

UNIT

Advanced Setup

0.01 sec

0.01 sec

10.00 sec

0.0 sec

4-58

MOP Reset Sel


Sets the drive to save the current MOP Reference command.

0 = Zero MOP Ref

This option clamps Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at 0.0 Hz when drive is not running.

1 = Save MOP Ref (Default)

Reference is saved in Parameter 169 (Internal Freq).

Parameter Number

Related Parameters

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

DB Threshold

Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation. If the DC bus voltage falls below the value set in this parameter, the Dynamic Brake will not turn on. Lower values will make the Dynamic Braking function more responsive, but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation.

Parameter Number

Access Rule

Data Type

Group

Units

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

262

169

Get/Set

UINT


—

0

1

0

263

GET/SET

UINT


—

0.0%

110.0%

100%

Chapter

5

Establishing a DeviceNet Node

Address

Node Commissioning using

Hardware

DeviceNet™ Commissioning

This chapter refers to Bulletin 280G/281G and 284G products.

The ArmorStart® is shipped with a default node address of 63 and

Autobaud enabled. Each device on a DeviceNet network must have a unique node address or MAC ID which can be set to a value from 0 to

63. Keep in mind that most DeviceNet systems use address 0 for the master device (Scanner) and node address 63 should be left vacant for introduction of new slave devices. The ArmorStart offers two methods for node commissioning as shown below.

The node address for a device can be changed using software or by setting hardware switches that reside on the back of the control module. While both methods yield the same result, it is good practice to choose one method and deploy it throughout the system.

The ArmorStart is shipped with the hardware rotary switches set to a value of (99). If the switches are set to a value (64) or above, the device will automatically configure itself to the software node address. If the switches are set to a value of (63) or less, the device will be at the node address designated by the switch configuration.

To set an address using the hardware rotary switches, simply set the switches to the desired node address and cycle power to the unit. The

Device will re-start at the new address.

Figure 5.1 Rotary Node Address Configuration

See Detail A

Detail A

5-2

DeviceNet™ Commissioning

Node Commissioning using

Software

To set the node address of the ArmorStart using software or other handheld tools, leave the hardware switches in there default position

(99) or insure that they are set to something greater than (63). With the hardware switches set, use the software or handheld tool to change the address.

To begin the configuration of ArmorStart using software, execute the

RSNetWorx™ software and complete the following procedure. You must use RSNetWorx Revision 3.21 Service Pack 2 or later.

1. Go on-line using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet. This can be accomplished by selecting the Network menu, and then choosing

Online.

2. Choose the appropriate DeviceNet PC interface. In this example, a 1784-PCIDS module is chosen. Other common DeviceNet interfaces are the 1770-KFD, and 1784-PCD.

Note: DeviceNet drivers must be configured using RSLinx prior to being available to RSNetWorx.

3. Click OK.

4. RSNetWorx will notify the user to upload or download devices before viewing configuration. Click OK.

5. RSNetWorx will now browse the network and display all of the nodes it has detected on the network. For some versions of

RSNetWorx software the ArmorStart EDS files and icon may not be included and will show up as an “Unregistered Device”. If the screen appears like the example below, continue with Building

and Registering an EDS file.

6. If RSNetWorx recognizes the device as an ArmorStart, skip ahead to the following section Changing the Node address (MAC

ID)

Building and Registering an EDS

File


5-3

The EDS file defines how RSNetWorx for DeviceNet will communicate to the ArmorStart. Follow the steps below to build and register the EDS file.

To register a device you must first obtain the EDS file from the following web page: http://www.ab.com/networks/eds

After obtaining the files do the following:

1. Right mouse click on the “Unrecognized Device” icon and choose Register Device from the menu.

2. Click Next. The following screen appears:

3. Choose “Register an EDS file(s)” as shown above and then click the Next button.

4. Choose to “Register a single file” and specify the file name or use the Browse button to locate the EDS file on your computer. If connected to the Internet you may use the Download EDS file button to automatically search for the correct EDS file.

5-4


5. Click the Next button.

6. The following screen will display any warning or errors if a problem occurs while registering the file. If a problem occurs insure that you have the correct file and try again. Click the Next button when no errors occur.

7. Select an alternative icon by highlighting the new device and clicking Change Icon. Once you have selected an icon, choose

OK and then click the Next button

8. When asked if you would like to register this device, click the

Next button.

Using the Node Commissioning

Tool Inside RSNetWorx for

DeviceNet


5-5

9. Click the Finish button. After a short while RSNetWorx will update your online screen by replacing the unrecognized device with the name and icon given by the EDS file you have just registered.

1. Choose “Node Commissioning” from the “Tools” menu at the top of the screen.

2. Clicking on Browse… will prompt a screen similar to the one below to appear.

3. Select the ArmorStart located at node 63, and then click OK. The node commissioning screen will have the “Current Device Settings” entries completed. It will also provide the current network baud rate in the “New ArmorStart Settings” area. Do not change the baud rate unless you absolutely sure that this value needs to be changed.

4. Enter the desired node address in the “New Device Settings” section. In this example, the new node address is 5. Click Apply to apply the new node address.

5-6


5. When the new node address has been successfully applied, the

“Current Device Settings” section of the window is updated as follows. If an error occurs, check to make sure the device is properly powered up and connected to the network.

System Configuration

6. Click Close to exit the node commissioning tool.

7. Choose “Single Pass Browse” from the “Network” menu to update RSNetWorx and verify that the node address is set correctly.

Selection of produced and consumed I/O assemblies (sometimes referred to as input and output assemblies) define the format of I/O message data that is exchanged between the ArmorStart and other devices on the network. The consumed information is generally used to command the state of its outputs, and produced information typically contains the state of the inputs and the current fault status of the device.

The default consumed and produced assemblies are shown below; for additional formats refer to Appendix B, page B-1. The ArmorStart default configuration varies depending on the type of starter.

Choosing the size and format of the I/O data that is exchanged by the

ArmorStart is done by choosing a consumed assembly instance number. This instance number is written to the Consumed IO Assy parameter. The different instances/formats allow user programming flexibility and network optimization.

Important: The Consumed and Produced IO Assy parameter values can not be changed while the ArmorStart is online with a scanner. Any attempts to change the value of this parameter while online with a scanner will result in the error message “Object State Conflict”.

Using Automap feature with default Input and Output (I/O)

Assemblies (Bulletin 280G/281G)


5-7

The Automap feature available in all Rockwell Automation scanners will automatically map the information as shown below. If manual mapping is not required, the information below can be used to map a device based on the default configuration.

Table 5.1 Default Input and Output (I/O) Assemblies

Message type

Consumed data size

Produced data size

Default

Polled

1 byte (Rx)

2 bytes (Tx)

Default Input and Output (I/O)

Assembly Formats (Bulletin 280G/

281G)

Byte

0

Bit 7

Not Used

Bit 6

Not Used

The I/O assembly format for the ArmorStart is identified by the value in parameter 11 (Consumed IO Assy.) and parameter 12 (Produced IO

Assy.). These values determine the amount and arrangement of the information communicated to the master scanner. The tables below identify the default information produced and consumed by the standard starter. For additional formats and advance configurations please reference Table B.13 on page B-5.

Bit 5

Not Used

Table 5.2 Instance 160 — Default Consumed Data for Standard Distributed

Motor Controller (1 byte)

Bit 4

Not Used

Bit 3

Not Used

Bit 2

Fault Reset

Bit 1

Run Rev

Bit 0

Run Fwd

Byte

0

1

Bit 7

Not Used

Not Used

Bit 6

140M On

Not Used

Table 5.3 Instance 161 — Default Produced Data for Standard Distributed

Motor Controller (2 bytes)

Bit 5

Not Used

User In 5

Bit 4

Ready

User In 4

Bit 3

Running Rev

User In 3

Bit 2

Running Fwd

User In 2

Bit 1

Warning

User In 1

Bit 0

Tripped

User In 0

5-8


Setting the Motor FLA and

Overload Trip Class (Bulletin 280G/

281G)

The product should now be configured and communicating on the network. The last step is to program the motor FLA setting

(parameter# 106) and overload trip class (parameter# 107). This can be accomplished by using software such as RSNetWorx for

DeviceNet or another handheld DeviceNet tool.

Using the software, access the device parameters screen as shown below. Notice that by default the motor FLA is set to the minimum

FLA setting for the device and the overload trip class is set to 10.

Select FLA setting (parameter #106) and enter a value that corresponds to the FLA of the motor connected to the ArmorStart.

Make sure the single radio button is selected and then select

Download to Device.

Select Overload Class (parameter #107) and choose the overload trip class to be used with the motor connected to the ArmorStart. The

ArmorStart can be set up for trip class 10, 15, or 20. Make sure the

Single radio button is selected and then select Download to Device.

The proper motor protection is now in place.

Figure 5.2 RSNetWorx Parameter Screen

Using Automap feature with default Input and Output (I/O)

Assemblies (Bulletin 284G)


5-9

The Automap feature available in all Rockwell Automation scanners will automatically map the information as shown below. If manual mapping is not required, the information below can be used to map a device based on the default configuration.

Table 5.4 Default Input and Output (I/O) Assemblies

Message type

Consumed data size

Produced data size

Default

Polled

4 bytes (Rx)

2 bytes (Tx)

Default Input and Output (I/O)

Assembly Formats (Bulletin 284G)

The I/O assembly formats for the ArmorStart are identified by the value in Parameter 11 (Consumed IO Assy.) and Parameter 12

(Produced IO Assy.). These values determine the amount and arrangement of the information communicated to the master scanner.

The tables below identify the default information produced and consumed by Bulletin 284G devices. For additional formats and advance configurations please reference the user manual:

Defaults for Bulletin 284G Distributed Motor Controllers

Table 1 Instance 164 — Default Consumed Inverter Type Distributed Starter

(4 bytes)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

0

1

2

3

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Not

Used

Drive

In 4

Not

Used

Drive

In 3

Not

Used

Jog

Rev

Jog Fwd

Drive

In 2

Drive

In 1

Decel Rate 2

Enable

Fault Reset

Decel Rate 1

Enable

Run Rev

Accel Rate 2

Enable

Comm Frequency Command (Low) (xxx.x Hz)

Comm Frequency Command (High) (xxx.x Hz)

Run Fwd

Accel Rate 1

Enable

Table 2 Instance 165 — Default Produced Inverter Type Distributed Starter

(4 bytes)

Byte

0

1

2

3

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

At

Reference

Reserved

140M On

Contactor 1

➊

Net Ctl

Status

Input

5

Ready

Input

4

Running

Rev

Input 3

Running

Fwd

Input 2

Output Frequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)

Warning

Input 1

Tripped

Input 0

Output Frequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)

➊ Refers to control brake contactor status..

5-10


Setting the Motor FLA (Bulletin

284G)

The product should now be configured and communicating on the network. The last step is to program the proper motor OL current setting (Parameter 133). This can be accomplished by using software such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet or a handheld DeviceNet tool.

Use the software to access the device parameters screen. By default the motor OL current is set to the minimum motor OL current setting for the device. Set this parameter to the desired value and download to the device.

Select Motor OL Current (Parameter 133) and enter a value that corresponds to the FLA of the motor connected to the ArmorStart.

Make sure the Single radio button is selected and then select

Download to Device.

The proper motor protection is now in place.

Figure 6 RSNetWorx Parameter Screen

193-DNCT Product Overview


5-11

The 193-DNCT product is a handheld device that can be used to commission, configure, program, and monitor other devices on a

DeviceNet™ network. In addition, the 193-DNCT can be used to upload, store, and later download complete device configurations for

DeviceNet™ devices via the network. The 193-DNCT also has the capability to present DeviceNet™ physical layer diagnostics and network bandwidth statistics to the user.

User Manual

For additional information regarding the 193-DNCT, refer to the User

Manual, 193-UM009*.

Bill of Material

The 193-DNCT product package includes the following items:

Item Description

193-DNCT DeviceNet™ Configuration Terminal

193-CB1 1 m DNCT Cable with color-coded bare leads

193-QR002_-EN-P DeviceNet™ Configuration Terminal Quick Reference

Quantity

1

1

1

Accessories

Description

1 m DNCT Cable with color-coded bare lead

1 m DNCT Cable with microconnector (male)

Door mount bezel kit

Mini-Mini-Micro Tee for connection to ArmorStart

5-pin connector

Catalog No.

193-CB1

193-CM1

193-DNCT-BZ1

1485P-P1R5-MN5R1

1787-PLUG10R

ATTENTION

The Bulletin 193 DeviceNet™ Configuration

Terminal should only be used on a DeviceNet™ network.

!

5-12


Tools Menu

The Tools Menu gives the user access to the Node Commissioning screen, a Class Instance Attribute editor, and a graphical parameter chart recorder screen. The Tools Menu is shown below:

Currently selected item

Node Commissioning

Pressing Enter while the NodeComm item is selected in the Tools

Menu invokes the Node Commissioning screen. Node commissioning allows the operator to change the Mac ID and/or the baud rate for the currently selected device.

This only appears if one of the fields has been changed.

Pressing Enter here will reset the DeviceNet™ HIM after writing any changes to the device

Logic Controller Application

Example with Explicit

Messaging

Chapter

6

Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet™

This chapter is designed to demonstrate programming and explicit message examples for both the SLC™ family of programmable controllers and ControlLogix® family of programmable controllers.

The examples will show how to develop a program for simple control and use a simple explicit message to retrieve data that is not automatically acquired based on the input and output assembly of the device. The user of the device can use this example as a guide in developing, their own programs.

Below is the RSNetWorx™ view of the simple network used in this example.

Figure 6.1 Simple Network

To assist in the development of the example the network will consist only of the ArmorStart® and scanner. Therefore the only mapped information in the scanner will be the ArmorStart. Refer to Chapter 5,

DeviceNet™ Commissioning for assistance in mapping.

6-2

Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet™

Programming the 1747-SLC

I/O Mapping

The following example will utilize the Standard Distributed Motor

Controller and the factory default input and output assembly of 160 and 161. Refer to Appendix B, Bulletin 280G/281G CIP Information for additional assembly formats. The default input and output assemblies are shown in the table below with the corresponding data size.

Byte 0

Address

Data

Byte 1

Address

Data

Bit 7

I:1.23

Reserved

Bit 15

I:1.31

Reserved

Table 6.1 Message Type (I/O Assembly)

Instance 160 – Consumed (output)

Instance 161 – Produced (input)

Data Size (bytes)

1 (Rx)

2 (Tx)

If a different I/O assembly is selected, the data size may change. It is important to understand that the I/O assembly selected here will directly affect the input and output mapping in the scanner’s scanlist and the amount of Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) memory reserved for this information.

)

Table 6.2 Example SLC Input Addressing (Produced Assembly)

Instance 161 Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor Controller

Bit 6

I:1.22

Reserved

Bit 14

I:1.30

Bit 5

I:1.21

Reserved

Bit 13

I:1.29

Bit 4

I:1.20

Ready

Bit 12

I:1.28

Bit 3

I:1.19

Running Rev

Bit 11

I:1.27

Bit 2

I:1.18

Running Fwd

Bit 10

I:1.26

Bit 1

I:1.17

Warning

Bit 9

I:1.25

Reserved 140M On HOA User In 3 User In 2 User In 1

Bit 0

I:1.16

Tripped

Bit 8

I:1.24

User In 0

Byte

Address

Data

Bit 7

O:1.23

Reserved

Table 6.3 Example SLC Output Addressing (Consumed Assembly)

)

Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller

Bit 6

O:1.22

Reserved

Bit 5

O:1.21

Reserved

Bit 4

O:1.20

Reserved

Bit 3

O:1.19

Reserved

Bit 2

O:1.18

Fault Reset

Bit 1

O:1.17

Run Rev

Bit 0

O:1.16

Run Fwd

The example PLC program for the SLC will use the “Tripped” and the “140M On” bit from the produced assembly and the “Fault

Reset”, “User Out A”, and “Run Fwd” bit from the consumed assembly.

Explicit Messaging with SLC


6-3

The 1747-SDN module uses the M0 and M1 file areas for data transfer. Only words 224 through 256 are used to execute the Explicit

Message Request and Response function. The minimum data size for the explicit message request is 6 words and the maximum is 32 words. The following tables illustrate the standard format of the explicit message request and response.

)

Table 6.4 Explicit Message Request (Get_Attribute_Single)

Bit location within Word

15 … 8

TXID

PORT

SERVICE

7 … 0

COMMAND

SIZE

MAC ID

CLASS

INSTANCE

ATTRIBUTE

Word - 0

Word - 1

Word - 2

Word - 3

Word - 4

Word - 5

Table 6.5 Explicit Message Response (Get_Attribute_Single)

15 … 8

TXID

PORT

SERVICE

Bit location within Word

7 … 0

STATUS

SIZE

MAC ID

DATA

Word - 0

Word - 1

Word - 2

Word - 3

• Transmission ID (TXID):

The scanner uses this value to track the transaction to completion, and returns the value with the response that matches the request downloaded by the SLC-500 processor. The TXID data size is one byte.

• Command:

This code instructs the scanner how to administer the request. A listing of these codes can be found in the 1747-SDN User

Manual, Publication 1747-5.8. The Command data size is one byte.

• Status:

The Status code provides the communication module’s status and its response.

• Port:

The physical channel of the scanner where the transaction is to be routed. The port setting can be zero (channel A) or one (channel

B). The Port data size is one byte. Please note that the 1747-SDN has only one channel, and so this value is always set to zero.

6-4


Setting up the Data File

• Size:

This identifies the size of the transaction body in bytes. The transaction body begins at word 3. The maximum size is 58 bytes.

The Size data size is one byte.

• Service:

This code specifies the type of request being delivered. The

Service data size is one byte.

• MAC ID:

The DeviceNet™ network node address of the device for which the transaction is intended is identified here. The slave device must be listed in the scanner module’s scan list and be on-line for the explicit message transaction to be completed.

• Class:

The desired DeviceNet class is specified here.

• Instance:

This code identifies the specific instance within the object class towards which the transaction is directed. The value zero is reserved to denote that the transaction is directed towards the class itself versus a specific instance within the class.

• Attribute:

This code identifies the specific characteristic of the object towards which the transaction is directed. The attribute data size is one word.

The following table lists the most common transaction types (get information and set information), and the appropriate service, class, instance, and attribute that corresponds to the type.

Table 6.6 Common Configuration Examples for ArmorStart

Transaction Type

Get_Attribute_Single

Set_Attribute_Single

Service

➊

Class

➊

Instance

➊ Attribute

0x0E

0x10

0x0F

0x0F

Par. #

➋

Par. #

➋

1

1

➌

➌

➊

The numeric values are in a hexadecimal format.

➋ This is the actual parameter number.

➌ The code “1” specifies the value of the instance (parameter).


6-5

Sequence of Events

Word

N7:x

Word

N7:x

Use the following sequence of events as a guide for establishing explicit messages in your SLC ladder logic.

1. Put the explicit message request data into an integer (N) file of the

SLC-500 processor.

2. Use the file copy instruction (COP) to copy the explicit message request data entered in step 1 to the M0 File, words 224 through

256.

3. Use the examine-if-closed instruction (XIC) to monitor bit 15 of the scanner’s module status register for an indication that it has received a response from the ArmorStart.

4. Copy the data from the M1 file, words 224 through 256, into a file in the SLC-500 processor using the file copy instruction (COP).

The following example shows the exact data format to perform a

“Get Attribute Single” request. This message will specifically access parameter 104, Average Current. The first three words are shown segmented into two bytes, corresponding to the upper and lower bytes shown in the explicit message request table (Table 6.4).

Note: The data in the table is shown in a hexadecimal format.

Therefore parameter 104 decimal is equal to 68 hexadecimal

(0x68).

TXID Command Port

0

01 01 00

1

Size

06

Table 6.7 Get_Attribute_Single Request

Service MAC ID

2

0E 04

Class

3

000F

Instance Attribute

4

0068

5

0001

TXID

01

10

Status

xx

Port

00

11

Size

06

Table 6.8 Get_Attribute_Single Response

Service MAC ID

12

0E 04

Data

13 x

14

—

15

—

6

—

16

—

7

—

17

—

Figure 6.2 SLC Example of Ladder Logic Program

6-6


If a trip condition exists, momentarily setting B3:0.1 will reset the fault. B3:0.0 will need to be re-initiated to start the “run Fwd”


6-7

6-8


Programming the

1756-ControlLogix

I/O Mapping

The following example will use the standard distributed motor controller and the factory default input and output assembly of 160 and 161. Refer to Appendix B for additional assembly formats. The default input and output assembly will again be used in the following example.

Byte 0

Address

Tag Name

Data

Byte 1

Address

Tag Name

Data

Bit 7

Local:1:I.

Data[1].7

— reserved

Bit 15

Local:1:I.

Data[1].15

— reserved

Note: The addressing is different between the SLC 1747 and

ControlLogix 1756 program. It is important that the user understand how to create and use “tags” in order to properly follow the example. Please see the RSLogix™ 5000 programming manual for additional help with defining tags.

The tables below list the data configuration for the ControlLogix platform and include the tag name as used in the example program.

)

Table 6.9 Example ControlLogix Input Addressing (Produced Assembly)

Instance 161 Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor Controller

Bit 6

Local:1:I.

Data[1].6

— reserved

Bit 14

Local:1:I.

Data[1].14

140M On reserved

Bit 5

Local:1:I.

Data[1].5

— reserved

Bit 13

Local:1:I.

Data[1].13

—

User In 5

Bit 4

Local:1:I.

Data[1].4

—

Ready

Bit 12

Local:1:I.

Data[1].12

—

User In 4

Bit 3

Local:1:I.

Data[1].3

—

Bit 2

Local:1:I.

Data[1].2

—

Running Rev Running Fwd

Bit 11

Local:1:I.

Data[1].11

—

User In 3

Bit 10

Local:1:I.

Data[1].10

—

User In 2

Bit 1

Local:1:I.

Data[1].1

Status_ warning

Warning

Bit 9

Local:1:I.

Data[1].9

—

User In 1

Bit 0

Local:1:I.

Data[1].0

Status_ tripped

Tripped

Bit 8

Local:1:I.

Data[1].8

—

User In 0

Byte 0

Address

Tag Name

Data

Bit 7

Local:1:O.

Data[1].7

— reserved

)

Table 6.10 Example ControlLogix Output Address (Consumed Assembly)

Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller

Bit 6

Local:1:O.

Data[1].6

— reserved

Bit 5

Local:1:O.

Data[1].5

— reserved

Bit 4

Local:1:O.

Data[1].4

— reserved

Bit 3

Local:1:O.

Data[1].3

— reserved

Bit 2

Local:1:O.

Data[1].2

Control_fault

Reset

Fault Reset

Bit 1

Local:1:O.

Data[1].1

—

Run Rev

Bit 0

Local:1:O.

Data[1].0

—

Run Fwd

Explicit Messaging with

ControlLogix


6-9

The ControlLogix platform requires significantly less structure to initiate an explicit message. The explicit message Request and

Response is configured within the MSG function. The MSG function can be found in the Input/Output tab of RSLogix 5000. Notice that in the ControlLogix program example, rung 6 is the only required logic to complete the explicit message request.

Setting Up the MSG Instruction

A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information can be defined. In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_mess. After the instruction has been named, click on the gray box to define the rest of the instruction.

The following example shows the exact data format to perform a Get

Attribute Single request. This message will specifically access parameter 104, Average Current. See Table 6.6 on page 6-4 for additional configurations.

Figure 6.3 Message Configuration

• Message Type

Select CIP Generic from pull down menu to configure an explicit message.

• Destination Element

This is the tag name of the location you are going to place the response information. In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_data.

6-10


• Service Type

The pull down menu has several options, however only the Get

Attribute Single is used for this example.

The Class, Instance, and Attribute define the actual information being requested. Additional configurations of these parameters can be found in Appendix B.

• Class

In this example the value is “F”

• Instance

In this example the value is “104”

• Attribute

In this example the value is “1”

After the above information has been entered, click on the communication tab.

• Path

The path will define the route the message will take to get to the device it is intended for. In this example the path is Scanner,2,4; where scanner is the name of the 1756-DNB in the rack, 2 represents the DeviceNet port, and 4 represents the physical node address of the ArmorStart.

Figure 6.4 Scanner Path


Figure 6.5 ControlLogix Example of Ladder Logic Program

6-11

6-12

Notes


DeviceLogix Programming

Chapter

7

Using DeviceLogix™

DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the

ArmorStart®. The program is embedded in the product software so that there is no additional module required to use this technology;

RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet™ is required to program the device.

In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix program will only run if the logic has been enabled. This can be done within the “Logic Editor” of RSNetWorx.

The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the “Network

Override” and “Communication Override” parameter. The following information describes the varying levels of operation:

• If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the ONLY time DeviceLogix will run is if there is an active I/O connection with a master, i.e. the master is in Run mode. At all other times

DeviceLogix will be running the logic, but will NOT control the state of the outputs.

• If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then

DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in

Run mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or

Module Bus off condition occurs.

• If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, the device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there is control power and a DeviceNet power source connected to the device, the logic will control the state of the outputs.

DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.

DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND, OR, NOT, timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is done by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device hardware.

Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the

ArmorStart.

7-2

Using DeviceLogix™

DeviceLogix Programming

Example

There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the most common are listed below:

• Increased system reliability

• Fast update times (1 - 2 ms possible)

• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting

• Operation independent of PLC or Network status

• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions

• Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic

The following example will show how to program a simple logic routine to interface the ArmorStart with a remote hard-wired startstop station. In this case the I/O is wired as shown in the table.

Table 7.1 Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the ArmorStart

Bit

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input Table

Description

Start Button

Stop Button

N/A

N/A

Bit

Run Fwd

N/A

—

—

Output Table

Description

Contactor Coil

N/A

—

—

Important: Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under which the logic will run. As defined earlier, the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8 (Network Override) and parameter 9

(Comm. Override) to the desired value.

1. While in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, Double click on the

ArmorStart.

2. Click on the “DeviceLogix” tab. If you are on-line with a device a dialog box will appear asking you to upload or download. Click on “Upload.”

3. Click the Start Logic Editor button.

4. If programming off-line continue to step 5, otherwise click on the

“Edit” button. Click “Yes” when asked if you want to Enter Edit

Mode. Once in edit mode the entire list of Function Blocks will be displayed in the toolbar.

5. Left Click on the “RSL” function block. This is a reset dominate latch.

6. Move the cursor into the grid, and left click to drop the function onto the grid.


7-3

7. From the toolbar, Click on the “Discrete Input” button and select

Input 0 from the pull-down menu. This is the remote start button based on the example I/O table.

8. Place the input to the left of the RSL function. To drop the input on the page, left click on the desired position.

9. Place the mouse cursor over the tip of Input 0. The tip will turn green. Click on the tip when it turns green.

10. Move the mouse cursor toward the input of the RSL function. A line will follow the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the RSL function will also turn green. Click the on Input and the line will be drawn from Input 0 to the Set Input of the

RSL function.

Note: If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than green. Left double clicking on the unused portion of the grid or pressing the “Esc” key at any time will cancel the connection process.

11. From the toolbar, Click on the “Discrete Input” button and select

Input 1 from the pull-down menu. This is the remote stop button based on the example I/O table.

12. Place the input to the left of the RSL function.

13. Connect the input to the reset input of the RSL latch.

7-4


14. From the toolbar, Click on the “Discrete Output” button and select “Run Fwd” from the pull-down menu. Run Fwd is the relay controlling the coil of the contactor. Click OK.

15. Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the RSL function block.

16. Connect the output of the “RSL” function block to Run Fwd.

17. Click on the “Verify” button located in the toolbar or select

“Logic Verify” from the “Tools” pull-down menu.

18. Click on the “Edit” button to toggle out of edit mode if online with a device.

19. Go to the pull-down menu in the right corner of the toolbar and select “Download”.

20. Note: Ensure that the PLC key switch is in the Program position.

If in any other position, the download will not occur and an error will be generated.

21. Press “OK” when told the download was successful.

22. Now from the same pull-down menu select “Logic Enable On.”

23. The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active.

ArmorStart Fault Bit, Status Bit,

Outputs and Produced Network

Bits in the DeviceLogix Ladder

Editor


7-5

All ArmorStart Distributed Motor Starters support DeviceLogix.

When using the DeviceLogix ladder editor to program logic for an

ArmorStart, the bit names that are associated with fault bits, status bits, outputs and produced network bits when using the original

DeviceLogix function block editor are not presented by the ladder editor. Instead, these bits are numbered. Fault bits such as “Overload

Trip” are tagged “FB0, FB1, FB2, etc. Status bits such as “Running

Fwd” are tagged SB0, SB1, SB2, etc. Outputs such as “Run Reverse” are tagged DOP0, DOP1 etc. Produced Network Bits such as “Fault

Reset” are tagged PNB0, PNB1, etc.

The following steps provide information to program ArmorStart

DeviceLogix programs with the ladder editor.

1. Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart Status Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose status bits in the ladder editor.

The following list contains the status bit definitions for Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart units:

ArmorStart Revision 2.xxx (280G and 281G)

0 = Tripped

1 = Warning

2 = Running Fwd

3 = Running Rev

4 = Ready

5 = Net Ctl Status

6 = Keypad Hand

7 = HOA Status

8 = 140M On

9 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists

10 = IO Cnxn Exists

11 = Explicit Cnxn Fault

12 = IO Cnxn Fault

13 = IO Cnxn Idle

14 = Current Flowing

15 = Keypad Hand Direction

16 = ZIP1 Cnxn

17 = ZIP1 Fault

18 = ZIP2 Cnxn

19 = ZIP2 Fault

20 = ZIP3 Cnxn

21 = ZIP3 Fault

22 = ZIP4 Cnxn

23 = ZIP4 Fault

7-6


2. Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart Fault Bits

The screen capture below how to choose fault bits in the ladder editor.

The following list contains the fault bit definitions for Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart units:


0 = Short Circuit

1 = Overload

2 = Phase Loss

3 = Control Power

4 = IO Fault

5 = Over Temp

6 = Phase Imbalance

7 = DNet Power Loss

8 = EEprom

9 = HW Flt

10 = PL Warning

11 = CP Warning

12 = IO Warning

13 = Phase Imbal Warn

14 = DN Warning

15 = HW Warning


3. Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart Produced Network Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network

Bits in the ladder editor.

7-7

The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for

Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart units:


0 = Net Output 0

1 = Net Output 1

2 = Net Output 2

3 = Net Output 3

4 = Net Output 4

5 = Net Output 5

6 = Net Output 6

7 = Net Output 7

8 = Net Output 8

9 = Net Output 9

10 = Net Output 10

11 = Net Output 11

12 = Net Output 12

13 = Net Output 13

14 = Net Output 14

15 = Fault Reset

16 = Motion Disable

17 = Keypad Disable

7-8


4. Bulletin 284G ArmorStart Status Bits

The following table contains the status bit definitions for Bulletin

284G ArmorStart:

Power Flex 40 Revision 2.00x (284G)

0 = Tripped

1 = Warning

2 = Running Fwd

3 = Running Rev

4 = Ready

5 = Net Ctl Status

6 = Net Ref Status

7 = At Reference

8 = Drive Opto 1

9 = Drive Opto 2

10 = Keypad Jog

11= Keypad Hand

12 = HOA Status

13 = 140M On

14 = Contactor 1

15 = Contactor 2

16 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists

17 = IO Cnxn Exists

18 = Explicit Cnxn Fault

19 = IO Cnxn Fau

20 = IO Cnxn Idle

21 = Keypad Hand Direction

22 = ZIP1 Cnxn

23 = ZIP1 Fault

24 = ZIP2 Cnxn

25 = ZIP2 Fault

26 = ZIP3 Cnxn

27 = ZIP3 Fault

28 = ZIP4 Cnxn

29 = ZIP4 Fault


5. Bulletin 284G ArmorStart Fault Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose Fault Bits in the ladder editor.

7-9

The following table contains the fault bit definitions for Bulletin

284G ArmorStart:

ArmorStart Revision 2.xxx (284G)

0 = Short Circuit

1 = Overload

2 = Phase Short

3 = Ground Fault

4 = Stall

5 = Control Power

6 = IO Fault

7 = Over Temp

8 = Phase Over Current

9 = DNet Power Loss

10 = Internal Comm

11 = DC Bus Fault

12 = EEprom

13 = HW Flt

14 = Reset Retries

15 = Misc. Fault

16 = CP Warning

17 = IO Warning

18 = DN Warning

19 = HW Warning

7-10


6. Bulletin 284G ArmorStartProduced Network Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network

Bits in the ladder editor.

The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for

Bulletin 284G ArmorStart units:

ArmorStart Revision 2.xxx (284G)

0 = Net Output 0

1 = Net Output 1

2 = Net Output 2

3 = Net Output 3

4 = Net Output 4

5 = Net Output 5

6 = Net Output 6

7 = Net Output 7

8 = Net Output 8

9 = Net Output 9

10 = Net Output 10

11 = Net Output 11

12 = Net Output 12

13 = Net Output 13

14 = Net Output 14

15 = Fault Reset

16 = Accel 1

17 = Accel 2

18 = Decel 1

19 = Decel 2

20 = Freq Select 1

21 = Freq Select 2

22 = Freq Select 3

23 = Motion Disable

24 = Keypad Disable

Overview

ZIP Parameter Overview

Chapter

8

ArmorStart® ZIP Configuration

This chapter describes the steps necessary to configure the Zone

Interlocking Parameters (ZIP) to configure peer-to-peer communication between an ArmorStart and another ZIP enabled device such as another ArmorStart or a 1977-ZCIO module. First, an overview of the ZIP parameter set is presented. Then the steps necessary to enable peer-to-peer data production are described. Next, the steps necessary to enable peer-to-peer data consumption are described. Finally, the steps necessary to map the consumed peer-topeer data to the DeviceLogix™ data table for use in local logic are described.

Each ArmorStart can consume ZIP data from up to 4 other devices.

The 4 devices are referred to as “zones” of data and these zones are numbered from 1 to 4. The following parameters are used to configure a device for ZIP peer-to-peer communication:

8-2

ArmorStart® ZIP Configuration

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

79

80

77

78

75

76

88

89

90

Param #

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

Parameter Name

AutoRun ZIP

Zone ProducedEPR

Zone ProducedPIT

Zone #1 MacId

Zone #2 MacId

Zone #3 MacId

Zone #4 MacId

Zone #1 Health

Zone #2 Health

Zone #3 Health

Zone #4 Health

Zone #1 Mask

Zone #2 Mask

Zone #3 Mask

Zone #4 Mask

Zone #1 Offset

Zone #2 Offset

Zone #3 Offset

Zone #4 Offset

Zone #1 EPR

Zone #2 EPR

Zone #3 EPR

Zone #4 EPR

Zone #1 Control

91 Zone #2 Control

92 Zone #3 Control

93 Zone #4 Control

96

97

94

95

98

99

Zone #1 Key

Zone #2 Key

Zone #3 Key

Zone #4 Key

Device Value Key

Zone Ctrl Enable

Parameter Description

Enables ZIP data production on power up

0=Disable; 1=Enable

The Expected Packet Rate in msec. Defines the rate of at which ZIP data is produced. Defaults to 75 msec.

The Production Inhibit Time in msec. Defines the minimum time between Change of State data production






0=Healthy; 1=Not Healthy
















The Expected Packet Rate in msec. for the zone 2 consuming connection. If consumed data is not received in 4 times this value, the zone connection will time out and “Zone #2 Health” will report 1 = Not Healthy



Zone 1 Control Word. Default Bit 1 set, all other bits clear.


Bit1=COS Cnxn 1=Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages

Bit2=Poll Cnxn 1=Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs.

Bit3=Strobe Cnxn 1=Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs.

Bit4=Multicast Poll 1=Consume Multicast Poll Response messages.



















When the “Security Enable” bit for zone 1 is enabled, this value must match the value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 1.




This value is produced in the last 2 bytes of data when one of the ZIP assemblies is chosen for data production.

Global enable for ZIP peer-to-peer messaging. This parameter must be disabled before any changes to the ZIP configuration for the device can be made. 0=Disable; 1=Enable

Data Production

Data Consumption

Mapping Consumed Data to the

DeviceLogix Data Table.


8-3

In a typical ZIP system, each device on the network automatically produces IO data using “Change of State” (COS) triggering. The automatic production of this COS data by an ArmorStart is enabled by setting Parameter 67 (AutoRun ZIP) to a value of 1 = Enable. Then

COS data will be produced automatically when the global ZIP enable parameter (Zone Ctrl Enable, Parameter 99) is set to the value of 1 =

Enable. Data production will take place at a rate specified by

Parameter 68 (Zone ProducedEPR). The minimum period between

Change of State productions is determined by the value of Parameter

69 (Zone ProducedPIT)

In the ArmorStart data from up to 4 other devices can be consumed for use in the local logic. The 4 devices whose data is to be consumed are logically referred to by zone number, i.e. zones 1 – 4. To configure an ArmorStart to consume data from another node on the network, the node address or “MacId” is placed in the proper “Zone MacId” parameter (parameters 70-73). For example to configure an

ArmorStart to consume data for zone 1 from node number 11 on the network, the value 11 is placed in Parameter 70 (Zone #1 MacId).

Not all zones need to be configured to consume data. If the user wishes to turn off data consumption for a zone, the value 64 is placed in the Zone MacId parameter for that zone.

The ArmorStart monitors the frequency at which all consumed data is received in order to determine the health of each zone’s data connection. The Zone EPR parameters (parameters 86-89) define the

“Expected Packet Rate” for each of the 4 zone connections.

If no consumed data for a zone is received in 4 times the EPR, then the zone connection times out, and the value of the corresponding

“Zone Health” parameter (parameters 74-77) is set to the value 1 =

Not Healthy. The “Zone Health” status of each zone is also available for use in DeviceLogix programs.

Consumed data for the 4 zones is placed in an 8 byte section of the

DeviceLogix Data Table. Individual bits in this section of the

DeviceLogix Data Table can be used in DeviceLogix programs. The table below shows the organization of the 8 bytes of the data table

Byte #

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Bit Number and Name

ZIP 7 ZIP 6 ZIP 5 ZIP 4 ZIP 3 ZIP 2 ZIP 1 ZIP 0


ZIP 23 ZIP 22 ZIP 21 ZIP20 ZIP 19 ZIP 18 ZIP 17 ZIP 16






8-4


The “Zone Mask” parameters (parameters 78-81) select individual bytes within a consumed message for placement in the DeviceLogix

Data Table. Each single bit in the mask represents a corresponding byte in the consumed message packet. For example, consider an

ArmorStart that has zone 1 configured to consume data from another

ArmorStart that is producing data of the following format:

Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs and ZIP CCV

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

4

5

6

1 Ready Running Rev Running Fwd Warning Tripped

2 140M On HOA User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1

3 Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6 Net Out 5 Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1

Net Out 15 Net Out 14 Net Out 13 Net Out 12 Net Out 11 Net Out 10

Device Value Key (low)

Device Value Key (high)

Net Out 9

The user can choose to place only bytes 1 and 2 of the above consumed data in the DeviceLogix Data Table by selecting a Zone

Mask value of 00000011 binary as shown in the following

RSNetWorx for DeviceNet screen:

The “Zone Offset” parameters (parameters 82-85) determine where in the DeviceLogix Data Table to place the consumed data bytes chosen for mapping. The “Zone Offset” value corresponds to a byte in the

DeviceLogix Data Table where the data should be placed. Continuing our example from above, a value of 2 in the “Zone #1 Offset” parameter would result in the masked consumed data bytes being placed starting at byte 2 in the data table. This would result in the following ZIP bit assignments:

ZIP 16 = Zone 1: Tripped

ZIP 17 = Zone 1: Warning


8-5

ZIP 18 = Zone 1: Running Fwd

ZIP 19 = Zone 1: Running Rev

ZIP 20 = Zone 1: Ready

ZIP 21 = Zone 1: reserved



ZIP 24 = Zone 1: User In 1




ZIP 28 = Zone 1: HOA

ZIP 29 = Zone 1: 140M Stat



ZIP bits appear in the list of Network Input Points that are available for use in the DeviceLogix Editor in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet as shown below:

ZIP Example

Consider the following network with 4 ArmorStarts and a 1799-ZCIO module.

8-6


We will configure node 10 to consume data as follows:

Zone 1 data will come from node 11



Zone 4 data will come from node 14.

First we must set up nodes 11-14 to “Auto Produce” data when ZIP is enabled.

For the ArmorStarts at node 11-13 (shown above) this is done by setting parameter 67 “AutoRun Zip” to “Enabled”. Note that we will leave parameters 68 and 69 at their default values so that data will be produced every 75 msec.

For the 1799-ZCIO module (shown below) this is done by setting parameter 13 “AutoRun Zip” to “Enabled”.


8-7

Next we must configure data consumption for the 4 zones in the

ArmorStart at node 10.

First set the “Zone MacId” parameters as shown below:

8-8


We will leave the “Zone EPR” parameters at their default value of 75 msec. This tells our ArmorStart that if no data for a zone is consumed for a period of 300 msec (4 times the EPR), the zone connection should time out and the health status should be set to “Not Healthy”.

We will also leave the “Zone Control” parameters at their default telling the ArmorStart to consume Change of State Data for each zone, and to disable data security checking. Since data security checking is disabled, we can also leave parameters 94-98 at their default values of 0.

We will set the “Zone Masks” to the value of 00000011 binary. This tells each zone to map bytes 1 and 2 to the DeviceLogix Data Table.


8-9

We will set the “Zone Offsets as shown below. This maps zone 1 data to byte 0 of the DeviceLogix Data Table, zone 2 data to byte 2 of the

DeviceLogix Data Table, zone 3 data to byte 4 of the DeviceLogix

Data Table and zone 4 data to byte 6 of the DeviceLogix Data Table.

Assuming the ArmorStarts mapped to zones 1 to 3 are producing the following data:

8-10


Byte

1

2

3

4

5

6

Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs and ZIP CCV


140M On

Ready Running Rev Running Fwd Warning

HOA User In 4 User In 3 User In 2

Tripped

User In 1

Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6 Net Out 5 Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1

Net Out 15 Net Out 14 Net Out 13 Net Out 12 Net Out 11 Net Out 10 Net Out 9

Device Value Key (low)

Device Value Key (high)

And assuming that the 1799-ZCIO module is producing the following data:

Byte

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

1799-ZCIO Produced Assembly


Input 7

Output 7

Input 6

Logic Ena

Output 6

Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

Input 9

Input 0

Input 8

Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Output 0

Output 9 Output 8


ZIP CCV (Low)

ZIP CCV (High)

The above configuration results in the following DeviceLogix ZIP

Data Table mapping:


















































ZIP 48 = Zone 4: Input 0














ZIP 62 = Zone 4: Logic Ena


8-11

8-12


Finding ZIP bits in the DeviceLogix

Editor

The 64 ZIP bits are available for use in DeviceLogix programs in the list of “Network Input Points”.

Network

Input Points

Select “Network Input Points” in the DeviceLogix editor toolbar, and scroll down past the first 16 Network Inputs. The 64 ZIP bits are available for use in the list as shown below:

Overview

Fault Display

Chapter

9

Diagnostics

This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart®

Distributed Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur.

Protection Programming

Many of the protective features available with the ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controller can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters provided. For further details on programming, refer to Chapter 3 and 4, Program and Status

Parameters.

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller comes equipped with a built-in LED status indication which provides four status LEDs and a

Reset button. The LEDs provide status indication for the following:

• Power LED

The LED is illuminated solid green when control power is present and with the proper polarity

• RUN LED

This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control power are present

• Network LED

This bi-color (red/green) LED indicates the status of the communication link

• FAULT LED

Indicates Controller Fault (Trip) condition

The Reset Button provides local fault trip reset.

Figure 9.1 LED Status Indication and Reset

Important: Resetting the fault will not correct the cause of the fault condition. Corrective action must be taken before resetting the fault.

9-2

Clear Fault

Diagnostics

Fault Codes

You may clear a fault using the following methods:

• Remotely via network communications

• A remote reset will be attempted upon detection of a rising edge

(0 to 1 transition) of the “Fault Reset” bit in the various I/O assemblies. A remote reset will also be attempted upon detection of the rising edge of the “Fault Reset” parameter.

• Locally via the “Reset” button on the LED Status indication keypad.

Table 9.1 provides a complete reference of the Fault LED indications for Bulletin 280G/281G and 284G ArmorStart Distributed Motor

Controllers.

8

9

10

11

12

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

13

14

15

16

Table 9.1 Fault Indication

Blink Pattern

Fault Types


Short Circuit

Overload Trip

Phase Loss

Reserved

Reserved

Control Power

I/O Fault

Over Temperature

Phase Imbalance

DeviceNet™ Power Loss

Reserved

Reserved

EEPROM Fault

Hardware Fault

Reserved

Reserved

Bulletin 284G

Short Circuit

Overload Trip

Phase Short

Ground Fault

Stall

Control Power

I/O Fault

Over Temperature

Over Current

DeviceNet™ Power Loss

Internal Communications

DC Bus Fault

EEPROM Fault

Hardware Fault

Restart Retries

Misc. Fault

Fault Definitions

Diagnostics

9-3

Short Circuit

Short Circuit indicates that the Bulletin 140M motor protector has tripped, or that the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current surge. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 1-blink pattern.

Overload Trip

The load has drawn excessive current and based on the overload trip class selected, the device has tripped. This fault cannot be disabled.

The Fault LED will flash a 2-blink pattern.

Phase Loss

Indicates a missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default. The Fault LED will flash a 3-blink pattern.

Phase Short

Indicates the drive has detected a phase short. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 3-blink pattern.

Ground Fault

Indicates the drive has detected a ground fault. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 4-blink pattern.

Stall

Indicates the drive has detected a stall condition, indicating the motor has not reached full speed. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault

LED will flash a 5-blink pattern.

Control Power

Indicates a loss of control power voltage or a blown control power fuse. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default. The Fault


I/O Fault

This error can indicate a shorted sensor, shorted input device, or input wiring mistakes

.

This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

The Fault LED will flash a 7-blink pattern.

Over Temperature

Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 8-blink pattern.

Phase Imbalance

Indicates an imbalance supply voltage. This fault can be disabled and

is disabled by default. The Fault LED will flash a 9-blink pattern.

9-4

Diagnostics

Over Current

Indicates the drive has detected an over current fault. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 9-blink pattern.

DeviceNet™ Power Loss

DeviceNet power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold

.

This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default. The

Fault LED will flash a 10-blink pattern.

Internal Communication Fault

Indicates an internal communication fault has been detected. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash 11-blink pattern.

DC Bus Fault

Indicates the drive has detected a DC Bus Fault. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 12-blink pattern.

EEPROM Fault

This is a major fault, which renders the ArmorStart inoperable. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 13-blink pattern.

Hardware Fault

Indicates incorrect base/starter assembly. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 14-blink pattern.

Restart Retries

This fault is generated when the drive detects that the auto retries count has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault


Miscellaneous Faults

For Bulletin 284G units, this fault is actually the logical OR of the drive’s Auxiliary Input fault (fault code F2), Heatsink Over

Temperature (fault code F8), Params Defaulted fault (fault code F48) and SVC Autotune fault (fault code F80).

This fault cannot be disabled. The Fault LED will flash a 16-blink pattern.

Introduction

Chapter

10

Troubleshooting

The purpose of this chapter is to assist in troubleshooting the

ArmorStart® Distributed Motor Controller using the LED Status

Display and diagnostic parameters.

ATTENTION

!

Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous. Electrical shock, burns or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel as well as others who might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities, follow the local safety related work practices (for example, the

NFPA70E, Part II in the United States).

Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.

ATTENTION

!

Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits.

The cause of the fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to correct a control system of mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and /or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.

ATTENTION

!

The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge after removal of mains supply.

Before working on drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs (R, S, T, [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death.

Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels.

ATTENTION

!

Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

10-2

Troubleshooting

ATTENTION

!

This drive contains electrostatic discharge- (ESD) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Allen-Bradley

Publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding against

Electrostatic Damage, or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.

ATTENTION

!

An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life.

Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.


Troubleshooting

The following flowchart for Bulletin 280G/281G units, is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting.

Yes

Faulted Display

No

Fault

LED

Network

LED

See

Table 10.1

See

Table 10.8

Motor will not

Start

See

Table 10.7

Blink Pattern

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Troubleshooting

10-3

Definitions

Short Circuit

Overload Trip

Phase Loss

Reserved

Reserved

Control Power

I/O Fault

Reserved

Reserved

EEPROM Fault

Table 10.1 Fault LED Indications for Bulletin 280G and 281G ArmorStart

Distributed Motor Controllers

Over Temperature

Phase Imbalance

DNet Power Loss

Hardware Fault

Possible Causes or Remedies

The motor circuit protector has tripped, or the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current range. Try to reset the protector if tripped. If the condition continues, check the power wiring. This fault cannot be disabled.

The load has drawn excessive current and based on the trip class selected, the device has tripped. Verify that the load is operating correctly and the

ArmorStart is properly set-up. This fault cannot be disabled.

The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase. Verify that three-phase voltage is present at the line side connections. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

Not Used

Not Used

The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage or blown control power fuse. Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity.

Replace control voltage fuse if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input device, or input wiring mistakes or a blown output fuse. If this fault occurs, the offending problem should be isolated or removed prior to restarting the system. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.

The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance. Check the power system and correct if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

DeviceNet™ power has been lost or has dropped below the 12 volt threshold. Check the state of the network power supply and look for

DeviceNet media problems. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

Not Used

Not Used

This is a major fault, which renders the ArmorStart inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during EEprom storage routines.

If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling should clear the problem; otherwise, replacement of the ArmorStart may be required. This fault cannot be disabled.

This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem exists. Check for a base/starter module mismatch. If no mismatch exists, the ArmorStart may need to be replaced. (Hdw Flt is the factory-enabled default setting.) This fault cannot be disabled.

10-4

Troubleshooting

LED Status Indication

Fault or Network Status Led indicates a fault condition

No Fault condition indicated

Display is blank

Table 10.2 Motor Will Not Start – No Output Voltage to the Motor

Possible Cause

See Fault Description

Three Phase is absent

Control voltage is absent

Possible Solutions

See Table 10.1 and/or Table 10.12 addressing fault conditions

Check power system.

Check three-phase power wiring and correct if necessary

Check control wiring and polarity. Correct if necessary.

Troubleshooting

10-5

Bulletin 284G Troubleshooting


Some of the Bulletin 284G ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller faults are detected by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart, while others are detected by the internal drive. For internal drive faults, the internal hardware of the

ArmorStart simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state. No fault latching is done by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart for these faults. The Pr FltReset Mode parameter (Parameter 23) determines the Auto Resettability of only the faults that are detected on the main control board. These faults are listed as “param 23” autoresettable in 10.3. The Auto Resettability of the faults that are detected in the internal drive is controlled by internal drive parameters. These faults are listed as drive controlled in 10.3.The following flowchart for Bulletin 284G units, is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting.

Yes

Faulted Display

No

Define Nature of the Problem

Fault

LED

Network

LED

Motor will not start

See

Table 10.3

See

Table 10.12

See

Common

Symptoms and

Corrective

Actions

10-6

Troubleshooting

Table 10.3 Fault LED indications for Bulletin 284G ArmorStart Distributed

Motor Controllers

Blink

Pattern

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16


Possible Causes or Remedies

ArmorStart

Short

(140M)

—

—

—

—

Control

Power

IO Fault

—

—

DNet Power

Loss

Internal

Comm

—

—

—

—

—

Drive Controlled

—

Overload Fault

(Drive Error Codes 7 and 64)

Phase Short (Drive Error

Codes 41…43)

Ground Fault (Drive Error

Codes 13, 38…40)

Motor Stalled

(Drive Error Code 6)

—

—

Heatsink Over temperature


Over-Current

(Drive Error Codes 12 and 63)

—

—

DC Bus Fault

(Drive Error Codes 3, 4, and 5)

EEPROM Fault/Internal Comm

Flt

(Drive Error Codes 81 and

100)

Hardware Fault

(Drive Error Codes 2, 70, and

122)

Auto Restart Tries


Miscellaneous Fault

The circuit breaker has tripped. Try to reset the breaker. If the condition continues check the power wiring. This fault cannot be disabled.

An excessive motor load exists. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current) and verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting. Reduce load or extend Accel Time. This fault cannot be disabled.

The ArmorStart has detected a phase short. Excessive current has been detected between two of the output terminals. Check the motor for a shorted condition. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared. This fault cannot be disabled.

A current path to earth has been detected at or more of the drive output terminals or a phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase. Check the motor for a grounded condition. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared. This fault cannot be disabled.

Drive is unable to accelerate motor. Increase Parameter 139 and/or 167 (Accel Time x) or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current by Parameter 189. This fault cannot be disabled.

The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage. Check control voltage, wiring and proper polarity. Replace control voltage fuse if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

Depending on the types of modules in the configuration this error could be generated by a shorted sensor, shorted input device, wiring mistakes, or a blown output fuse. If this fault occurs, the offending problem should be isolated or removed prior to restarting the system. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value. Check for blocked or dirty heatsink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded. Replace internal fan. This fault cannot be disabled.

The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance. Check the power system and correct if necessary. This fault cannot be disabled.

DeviceNet

™ power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold. Check the state of the network power supply and look for DeviceNet media problems. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

This fault occurs when communications between the main board the drive is lost. This fault cannot be disabled. This fault cannot be disabled. Verify that the disconnect is in the “on” position and three phase power is present.

DC bus voltage remained below 85% of nominal. DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value. DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value. Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption. Check input fuses. Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions.

Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install a starter module with the dynamic brake option. This fault cannot be disabled.

This is a major fault, which renders the ArmorStart inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during EEprom storage routines. If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling should clear the problem. Otherwise replacement of the starter module may be required.

This fault cannot be disabled.

Indicates incorrect base/starter assembly. Auxiliary input interlock is open. Failure has been detected in the drive power section. Failure has been detected in the Drive control and I/O section.

Cycle power and replace drive if fault cannot be cleared. This fault cannot be disabled.

Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of

Parameter 192 (Auto RstrtTries). Correct the cause of the fault. This fault cannot be disabled.

This fault is actually the logical OR of the drive’s Auxiliary Input fault (Fault Code 2), Heatsink

Overtemperature fault (Fault Code 8), Parameter Defaulted fault (Fault Code 48), and SVC Autotune fault (Fault Code 80), Fan RPM Fault, and DB1 Fault. This fault cannot be disabled.

Troubleshooting

10-7

Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake

The DB1 Dynamic Brake option provides the following protection features:

• DB Resistor Overtemperature Fault

• DB Overcurrent Fault

• DB Undercurrent Fault

• DB Switch Fault

• DB Open Fault

• DB VBus Link Fault

• DB Thermal Warning

• DB Comm Fault

DB Resistor Overtemperature Fault

The DB1 measures current continuously, and models resistor body temperature based on measured current and resistor model parameters. The DB1 not only calculates the present resistor body temperature, but also predicts the future resistor body temperature.

The resistor overtemperature level is based on the predicted future resistor body temperature, not on the present resistor body temperature. This fault is disabled when parameter 182 (DB Resistor

Sel) is “Disabled.

Troubleshooting – DB Resistor body temperature is too hot. Allow resistor to cool.

DB Overcurrent Fault

The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Max

Current Level. If 5 consecutive samples are above the Max Current

Level, then a fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB resistance is lower than expected. This fault is disabled when parameter 182 (DB Resistor Sel) is “Disabled.

Troubleshooting – DB monitor has measured a DB current higher than expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to discharge. Disconnect DB resistor from ArmorStart control module. Caution- DB resistor may still be hot. Measure DB resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. DB resistor value should be within the limits defined in Table 10.4. If DB resistance value is within limits, replace control module. If not, replace DB resistor.

10-8

Troubleshooting

DB Undercurrent Fault

The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Min

Current Level. The Min Current Level = Min DB Voltage Level/Max

DB Resistance. If 5 consecutive samples are below the Min Current

Level and the DB is ON, then a fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB resistance is higher than expected. This fault is disabled when parameter 182 (DB Resistor

Sel) is “Disabled.

Troubleshooting – DB monitor has measured a DB current lower than expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to discharge. Disconnect DB resistor from ArmorStart control module. Caution- DB resistor may still be hot. Measure DB resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. DB resistor value should be within the limits defined in Table 10.4. If DB resistance value is within limits, replace control module. If not, replace DB resistor.

DB Switch Fault

A DB Switch fault is issued when continuous DB resistor current is detected when the Drive Bus Voltage level is less than the DB Voltage

Level. If 5 consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage less than DB

Level is detected along with continuous DB resistor current flow, then a shorted DB IGBT fault (DB Switch) is recorded.

It is the user’s responsibility to provide an input power contactor to each ArmorStart with a drive. The user must write logic to control

(open) the input contactor to the ArmorStart in the event of a DB

Switch Fault. The Instruction Literature provides information on how to connect the input contactor, and how to implement the logic.

Troubleshooting – Attempt to reset the fault by removing all power to the unit and restarting. If the fault persists, replace control module.

DB Open Fault

A DB Open fault is issued when Bus Voltage is greater than the DB

Voltage Level, and no DB resistor current has been detected. If 5 consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage greater than the DB Level is detected along with no DB resistor current flow, then an open DB fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the customer of an open DB resistor, or open wire. The fault is disabled when the DB

Resistor Setup parameter (82) is “Disabled”.

Troubleshooting – DB monitor expected to see current flow and measured none. Likely cause is an open DB resistor, loose DB resistor connector, or open wire in DB cable. Check DB cable connector for tightness. If problem persists, remove DB resistor cable connector from unit and check DB resistance. If DB resistor is open, replace DB resistor. Otherwise replace control module.

Troubleshooting

10-9

DB Thermal Warning

A DB Thermal Warning is issued if the predicted future resistor body temperature is greater than the Max DB resistor temperature x DB

Thermal Warning Percent.

Troubleshooting – None. DB resistor thermal value has exceeded the preset threshold of 90% of thermal value.

DB VBus Link Fault

For proper operation, the DB1 monitors parameters from the Drive internally inside the ArmorStart. If the internal communications to the drive is lost, then this fault is issued. Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection, the user must implement logic to open the input contactor.

Troubleshooting – Make sure that 3 phase line power and control power is applied to unit. Attempt to reset fault. If fault persists, replace control module.

DB Comm Fault

The communications link is monitored continuously. If the DB1 stops responding, then the MCB issues this fault. Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection, the user must implement logic to open the input contactor.

Troubleshooting – Replace control module.

Table 10.4 IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistance Values

Line Voltage

[V AC]

460

DB1 Resistor

Part Number

284R-360P500-M*

284R-360P500-M*

284R-360P500-M*

284R-120P1K2-M*

284R-120P1K2-M*

* - Indicates cable length (0.5 m or 1.0 m).

Drive

[kW (Hp)]

0.37 (0.5)

0.75 (1)

1.5 (2)

2.2 (3)

3.3 (5)

Minimum DB

Resistance [

Ω]

341.62

341.62

341.62

113.87

113.87

Maximum DB

Resistance [

Ω]

387.33

387.33

387.33

129.11

129.11

10-10

Troubleshooting

Internal Drive Faults

A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.

Type Description

1 Auto-Reset/Run

When this type of fault occurs, and Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) Related

Parameter(s): 155, 158, 161, 193 is set to a value greater than 0, a userconfigurable timer, Parameter 193 (AutoRstrt Delay) Related Parameter(s): 192, begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted

2 Non-Resettable

This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.

Automatically Clearing Faults (Option/Step)

Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive


2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.

Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive

1. Set 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.

Auto Restart (Reset/Run)

Troubleshooting

10-11

No.

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

Fault

Auxiliary Input

Power Loss

UnderVoltage

OverVoltage

Motor Stalled

Motor Overload

F8 Heatsink OvrTmp

F12 HW OverCurrent

F13

F33

Ground Fault

Auto Rstrt Tries

F38

F39

F40

Phase U to Gnd

Phase V to Gnd

Phase W to Gnd

F41

F42

Phase UV Short

Phase UW Short

F43 Phase VW Short

F48 Params Defaulted

The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention. This allows remote or unattended operation. Only certain faults are allowed to be reset. Certain faults

(Type 2) that indicate possible drive component malfunction are not resettable.Caution should be used when enabling this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming.

Table 10.5 Fault Types, Descriptions, and Actions

Type

➊

Description

1 Auxiliary input interlock is open.

Action

2 DC bus voltage remained below

85% of nominal.

1 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value.

1 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value.

1.

Check remote wiring.

2.

Verify communications.

3.

4.

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.

Check input fuses.

5.Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.

1 Drive is unable to accelerate motor.

7.Increase Parameter 139…167 (Accel Time x) or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).

1 Internal electronic overload trip 8.

An excessive motor load exists. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).

9.

Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting

1 Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value.

6.Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option.

2

2

The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit.

A current path to earth ground has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals.

Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of

Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries).

10.

Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40

°C.

11.

Replace internal fan.

12.Check programming. Check for excess load, improper programming of

Parameter 184 (Boost Select), DC brake volts set too high, or other causes of excess current.

13.Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition.

14.Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.

2 A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase .

2 Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals.

15.

Check the wiring between the drive and motor.

16.

Check motor for grounded phase.

17.

Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.

18.

Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition.

19.


F63 SW OverCurrent

F64

F70

F80

Drive Overload

Power Unit

SVC Autotune

2 The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM.

2 Programmed Parameter 198 (SW

Current Trip) has been exceeded.

2 Drive rating of 150% for 1 min. or

200% for 3 sec. has been exceeded.

2 Failure has been detected in the drive power section.

The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or failed.

20.

Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.

21.

Program the drive parameters as needed.

22.Check load requirements and Parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) setting.

23.Reduce load or extend Accel Time.

24.

Cycle power.

25.


26.Restart procedure.

10-12

No.

F81

F100

F122

Fault

Comm Loss

Parameter

Checksum

I/O Board Fail

Troubleshooting

Type

➊

Description

2 RS485 (DSI) port stopped communicating.

2 The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated.

2 Failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section.

Action

27.

Turn off using Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).

28.


29.Set Parameter 141 (Reset To Defaults) to option 1 Reset Defaults.

30.

Cycle power.

31.


➊

See Table 10.3 for internal drive fault types.Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions

Table 10.6 Motor Does Not Start

Cause(s) Indication

No output voltage to the motor.

Drive is

Faulted

None

Corrective Action

Check the power circuit.

• Check the supply voltage.

• Check all fuses and disconnects

Check the motor.

• Verify that the motor is connected properly.

• Verify that I/O Terminal 01 is active.

• Verify that Parameter 136 (Start Source) matches your configuration.

• Verify that Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable) is not prohibiting movement.

Flashing red status light

Clear fault.

• Press Stop

• Cycle power

• Set Parameter 200 (Fault Clear) to option 1 Clear Faults.

• Cycle digital input is Parameter 151…154 (Digital Inx Sel) is set to option 7 Clear Fault.

Table 10.7 Drive Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command

Cause(s)

No value is coming form the source of the command.

Incorrect reference source is being selected via remote device or digital inputs.

None

Indication Corrective Action

The drive

Run indicator is lit and output is

0 Hz.

• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.

• If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of signal.

• Check Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq) to verify correct command.

• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.

• Check Parameter 114 (Dig In Status) to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify settings for

Parameters 151…154 (Digital Inx Sel).

• Check Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) for the source of the speed reference. Reprogram as necessary.

Troubleshooting

10-13

Table 10.8 Motor and/or Drive Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed


Acceleration time is excessive.

None

Excess load or short acceleration times force the drive into current limit, slowing, or stopping acceleration.

None

Speed command source or value is not as expected.

None

None Programming is preventing the drive output from exceeding limiting values.

Torque performance does not match motor characteristics.

None


Reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter

167 (Accel Time 2).

• Compare Parameter 103 (Output Current) with

Parameter 189 (Current Limit1).

• Remove excess load or reprogram Parameter 139

(Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2).

• Check for improper setting of Parameter 184 (Boost

Select).

• Verify Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq).

• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for the proper

Speed Command.

Check Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) to insure that speed is not limited by programming.

• Set motor nameplate full load amps in Parameter

226 (Motor NP FLA).

• Use Parameter 227 (Autotune) to perform Static

Tune or Rotate Tune procedure.

• Set Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) to option 0V/Hz.

Table 10.9 Motor Operation is Unstable


None

Motor data was incorrectly entered.


1.

Correctly enter motor nameplate data into Parameters 131,

132, and 133.

2.

Enable Parameter 197 (Compensation).

3.

Use Parameter 184 (Boost Select) to reduce boost level.

Table 10.10 Drive Will Not Reverse Motor Direction


Digital input is not selected for reversing control.

None

None Motor wiring is improperly phased for reverse.

Reverse is disabled.

None


Check (Digital Inx Sel). Choose correct input and program for reversing mode.

Switch two motor leads.

Check Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable).

Table 10.11 Drive Does Not Power Up

Cause(s)

No input power to drive.

Indication

None


Check the power circuit.

• Check the supply voltage.

• Check all fuses and disconnects.

Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor.

Jumper between I/O Terminals P2 and P1 not installed and/or DC

Bus Inductor not connected.

None

10-14

Troubleshooting

Network Status LED

Off

Flashes green-red-off

Solid Green

Flashing Green

Flashing Red

Solid Red

Flashing Red and Green

DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures

The following table identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting DeviceNet related failures using the

NETWORK STATUS LED.

Table 10.12 DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures

Definition Possible Causes

The device has not completed the initialization, is not on an active network, or may not be powered up.

While waiting to detect the network baud rate, the

LED will flash this pattern about every 3 seconds.

Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network.

If the product stays in this state, it means that there is no set baud rate. Ensure that at least one device on the network has a set baud rate.

No action Required The device is operating in a normal condition, and is communicating to another device on the network.

The device is operating in a normal condition, and is on-line, but has no connection to another device.

This is the typical state for new devices.

Recoverable fault has occurred.

The device has detected a major error that has rendered it incapable of communicating on the network (Duplicate MAC ID, Bus-off, media issue).

The device has detected a network access error and is in a communication faulted state. The device has subsequently received and accepted an Identify

Communication Faulted Request Long Protocol message.

The device may need to be mapped to a master scanner, placed in a scanlist, or have another device communicate to it.

Check to make sure the PLC™ and scanner are operating correctly and that there are no media/ cabling issues. Check to see if other networked devices are in a similar state.

Troubleshooting should be done to ensure that the network is correct (terminators, lengths, etc.) and there is not a duplicate node problem. If other devices on the network appear to be operating fine and power cycling the device does not work, contact Technical Support.

This is not a common state for DeviceNet products.

Power cycling the device may resolve the problem; however, if the problem continues, it may be necessary to contact technical support.

Control Module Replacement

(Bulletin 280G/281G)

Troubleshooting

10-15

1

Removal of Starter Module

ATTENTION

To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power before working on the controller, motor, or control devices

!

1) Disconnect from power source

2) Remove motor cable.

3) Loosen the four mounting screws.

4) Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward.

Installation of Control Module

5) Install control module.

6) Tighten four mounting screws.

7) Install motor and control brake cable.

Figure 10.1 Bulletin 280G/281G Control Module Replacement

Motor Cable

2

3

4

Note: DeviceNet base module is shown

1

2

30 lb-in/

3.39 Nm

3

10-16

Troubleshooting

Control Module Replacement

(Bulletin 284G)

Removal of Control Module

ATTENTION


!

1) Disconnect from power source

2) Remove motor cable.

3) Loosen the four mounting screws.

4) Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward.

Installation of Control Module

5) Install control module.


7) Install all cables to starter module.

Figure 10.2 Bulletin 284G Control Module Replacement

1

2

3

4

3


30 lb-in/

3.39 Nm

2

1

Base Module Replacement



Troubleshooting

Removal of Base Module

ATTENTION


!

1) Disconnect from power source.

2) Remove motor, control brake, control and three-phase power, comunication, and all other cables connected to the inputs.

3) Loosen four mounting screws on the Starter Module.

4) Unplug the Control Module from the base by pulling forward.

Figure 10.3 Bulletin 280G/281G Base Module Removal

Base Module

10-17

1

Input/Output Cable

2

4

Communication

Cable

2

Motor Cable

3

Control Module

10-18

Troubleshooting



Installation of Base Module


3

ATTENTION


!

1) Mount Base Module with four mounting screws.

2) Install Control Module.

3) Tighten the four mounting screws.

4) Install motor, control brake, control and three-phase power, comunication, and all other cables connected to the inputs.

5) Tighten four mounting screws on the terminal access cover plate.


7) Tighten the four mounting screws.

8) Install motor cable, comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs.

Figure 10.4 Bulletin 280G/281G Base Module Installation

Base

Module

Input/

Output

Cable

4

2

46 - 50 lb-in

Communication

Cable

7

Motor Cable

Control Module


(Bulletin 284G)

Troubleshooting

10-19

Removal of Base Module

ATTENTION


!

1) Disconnect from power source.

2) Remove all cables from Control Module, comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs.

3) Loosen four mounting screws on the Control Module.

4) Unplug Control Module from the base by pulling forward.

5) Loosen mounting screws and remove.

Figure 10.5 Bulletin 284G Base Module Removal

Base Module

Input/Output

Cable

1

Communication

Cable

2

2

Motor

Cable

3

Control

Module

4

10-20

Troubleshooting


(Bulletin 284G)

2

3

Installation of Base Module

ATTENTION


!

1) Mount Base Module with four mounting screws.



4) Install all cables to Control Module, comunication, control and three-phase power, and all other cables connected to the inputs.

Figure 10.6 Bulletin 284G Base Module Installation

Base Module

Input/

Output

Cable

4

Control

Module

Communication

Cable

4

Motor

Cable

Figure 10.7 Control Voltage Fuse Replacement

Troubleshooting

10-21

Control Voltage Fuse

10-22

Notes:

Troubleshooting

Appendix

A

Specifications


Power Circuit

Electrical Ratings

Rated Operation Voltage

Control

Circuit

Short Circuit

Protection

Rate Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulsed Voltage

Dielectric Withstand

Operating Frequency

Utilization Category

Protection Against Shock

Rated Operating Current Max.


Rated Short Circuit

SCPD




Overvoltage Category

Operating Frequency

SCPD Performance Type 1

UL/NEMA

380/220V…480/277V AC

600V

4 kV

2200V AC

50/60 Hz

IEC

380/220V…480/277V AC

600 V

4 kV

2500V AC

50/60 Hz

N/A

N/A

AC-3

IP2X

2.5 A

5.5 A

16 A

Safety Products only: 24V DC (+10%, -15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)

120V AC (+10%, -15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)

1 kA

10 A circuit breaker or equivalent

250V

—

1500V AC

—

50/60 Hz

Voltage

250V

4 kV

2000V AC

III

50/60 Hz

480Y/277V Current Rating

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

Sym. Amps RMS

65kA

30kA

SCPD Fuses, only fuse types: J, CC, and T

100 A maximum

Input Ratings

SCPD UL 489 Circuit Breakers

Control Voltage

Contactor (Pick Up)

Contactor (Hold In)

120V AC Brake (Pick Up)

120V AC Brake (Hold In)

SCPD List

Total Control Power (Pick Up)

Total Control Power (Hold In)

Units

Volts

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

VA (W)

VA (W)


Input On-State Voltage Range

Input On-state Current

100 A maximum

Input Off-state Voltage Range

Input Off-state Current

Safety Products Only

C10 Base: 100 A maximum


Size per NEC Group Motor

Power Requirements

Non-Safety Products

120V AC, 50/60 Hz

0.58 plus the motor brake current

0.08 plus the motor brake current

—

—

70

9

24V DC

10…26V DC

3.0 mA @ 10V DC

7.2 mA @ 24V DC

0…5V DC

<1.5 mA

Safety Products

24V DC

1.09

30

motor brake pick-up current

motor brake hold-in current

(26)

(7.2)

Off to On

On to Off

Input Compatibility

Number of inputs

Voltage Status Only

Current Available

Input Filter — Software Selectable

Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments

N/A


IEC 1+

6

Sensor Source

11…25V DC from DeviceNet™

50 mA MAX per Input, 300 mA Total

A-2

Specifications

Bulletin 280G/281G, Continued

Environmental

Other Rating


Operating Temperature Range

Storage and Transportation temperature range

Altitude

Humidity

Pollution Degree

Enclosure Ratings

Approximate Shipping Weight

UL/NEMA

-20…40°C (-4…104°F)

–25….85°C (–13…185°F)

2000 m

5…95% (non-condensing)

3

NEMA 4/12/13

6.8 kg (15 lbs.)

Mechanical Resistance to Shock

IEC

IP67

Operational

Non-Operational

WireSize

Tightening Torque

Wire Strip Length

WireSize

Tightening Torque

Wire Strip Length

Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions

Radiated Emissions

Electrostatic Discharge

Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field

Fast Transient

Surge Transient

Overload Current Range

Trip Classes

Trip Rating

Number of poles

DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating

DeviceNet Input Current

External Devices powered by DeviceNet

Total w/max. Sensor Inputs (6)

DeviceNet Input Current Surge

Baud Rates

Distance Maximum

Motor Cable

Certifications

Resistance to Vibration

1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) displacement

2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) displacement

Power and Ground Terminals

Primary/Secondary Terminal:

#16 AWG…#10 AWG

Primary Terminal: 10.8 in·lb

Secondary Terminal: 4.5 in·lb


1.5 mm

2

…4.0 mm

2

Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m

Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m

0.35 in. (9 mm)

Control and Safety Monitor Inputs

#18 AWG…#10 AWG

1.0 mm

2

…4.0 mm

2

6.2 in·lb

0.35 in. (9 mm)

EMC Emission levels

Class A

Class A

EMC immunity levels

4 kV contact and 8 kV Air

10 V/m

0.7 N·m

2 kV

1 kV L-L, 2 kV L-N (Earth)

Overload Characteristics

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

10, 15, 20

120% of FLC setting

3

DeviceNet Specifications

Range 11…25V DC, 24V DC Nominal

167 mA @ 24V DC - 4.0 W

364 mA @ 11V DC - 4.0 W

Sensors Inputs 6* 50 mA - total 300 mA

367 mA @ 24V DC - 8.8 W

15 A for 250 μs

DeviceNet Communications

125, 250, 500 kbps

500 m (1630 ft) @ 125 kbps

200 m (656 ft) @ 250 kbps

100 m (328 ft) @ 500 kbps

10 AWG for all motor sizes cULus (File No. E3125)

UL 508

EN/IEC 60947-4-1

CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and EMC Directive 89/336/EEC

Specifications

A-3


Figure A.1 External Connections for Input Connector

1

2

5

4

3

Figure A.2 External Connections for Motor Connector @ 460V AC

Pin 1: +V Out

Pin 2: Input

Pin 3: Comm

Pin 4: Input

Pin 5: NC (No Connection)

Pin 1: T1 - Black

Pin 2: Ground - Green/Yellow

Pin 3: T3 - Red

Pin 4: T2 - White

Figure A.3 External Connections for DeviceNet™ Connector

Figure A.4 External Connections for Control Brake Connector

Figure A.5 External Connections for Three-Phase Power Input

Pin 1: GND - Green/Yellow

Pin 2: L1 - Black

Pin 3: L2 - White

Pin 1: L1 - Black


Pin 3: L3 - Red

Pin 4: L2 - White

A-4

Specifications


Figure A.6 External Connections for 120V AC Control Power


Pin 2: L1 - Black

Pin 3: L2 - White

Figure A.7 Safety Monitor Input (SM1/SM2)

Figure A.8 External Connections for Safety Input Power (A1/A2)

Pin 1: SM2- White

Pin 2: SM1 - Brown

Pin 3: N/C- No connection


Pin 1: M - White

Pin 2: A1 - Brown

Pin 3: P - Black

Pin 4: A2 - Blue


Figure A.9 Overload Trip Curves

10000

1000

100

10

1

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

Cold

Hot

10000


Class 15

100

Cold

Hot

1

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

% of


Class 20

10000

100

Cold

Hot

1

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

Specifications

A-5

A-6

Bulletin 284G

Specifications

Power Circuit






Operating Frequency

Utilization Category

Protection Against Shock

UL/NEMA

380/220V…480.277V AC

600V

4 kV

2200V AC

50/60 Hz

N/A

N/A

IEC

380/220V…480.277V AC

600 V

4 kV

2500V AC

50/60 Hz

AC-3

IP2X

Rated Operating Current Max.

2.5 A

5.5 A

16 A

Short Circuit

Protection

SCPD Performance

Current Rating

10 A

25 A

Voltage

Sym. Amps RMS

480Y/277V

65 kA

30 kA

—

SCPD Fuses, only fuse types: J, CC, and T

100 A maximum

Control

Circuit

Input Ratings

SCPD UL 489 Circuit Breakers

Control Voltage

SCPD List


Contactor (Hold In)

Total Control (Pick Up)

Total Control (Hold In)

Rated Short Circuit

SCPD



Contactor (Pick Up)


Overvoltage Category

Operating Frequency

120V AC Brake (Pick Up)

120V AC Brake (Hold In)

Units

Volts

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

VA (W)

VA (W)


Input On-State Voltage Range

Input On-state Current

Input Off-state Voltage Range

Input Off-state Current

100 A maximum

Safety Products Only



Size per NEC Group Motor —

Safety Products only: 24V DC (+10%, -15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)

120V AC (+10%, -15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)

1 kA

10 A circuit breaker or equivalent

250V

—

1500V AC

—

50/60 Hz

Power Requirements

Non-Safety Products

250V

4 kV

2000V AC

III

50/60 Hz

Safety Products

120V AC

0.35 plus motor brake pick-up current

0.10 plus motor brake hold-in current

—

—

42

12

24V DC

10…26V DC

3.0 mA @ 10V DC

7.2 mA @ 24V DC

0…5V DC

<1.5 mA

Input Filter — Software Selectable

24V DC

0.63

0.63

0.29 plus motor brake pick-up current

0.04 plus motor brake hold-in current

(15)

(15)

Off to On

On to Off

Input Compatibility

Number of inputs

Voltage Status Only

Current Available

N/A



IEC 1+

6

Sensor Source

11…25V DC from DeviceNet™

50 mA MAX per Input, 300 mA Total

Specifications

A-7

Bulletin 284G, Continued

Environmental

Other Rating


Operating Temperature Range

Storage and Transportation temperature range

Altitude

Humidity

Pollution Degree

Enclosure Ratings

Approximate Shipping Weight

UL/NEMA

-20…40°C (-4…104°F)

–25….85°C (–13…185°F)

2000 m

5…95% (non-condensing)

3

NEMA 4/12/13

18.1 kg (40 lbs.)

Mechanical Resistance to Shock

IEC

IP67

Operational

Non-Operational

WireSize

Tightening Torque

Wire Strip Length

WireSize

Tightening Torque

Wire Strip Length

Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions

Radiated Emissions

Electrostatic Discharge

Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field

Fast Transient

Surge Transient

Trip Class

Overload Protection

Number of poles

DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating

DeviceNet Input Current

External Devices powered by DeviceNet

Total w/max. Sensor Inputs (6)

DeviceNet Input Current Surge

Baud Rates

Distance Maximum

Motor Cable

Certifications

Resistance to Vibration

1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) displacement

2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) displacement

Power and Ground Terminals


#16 AWG…#10 AWG

Primary Terminal: 10.8 in·lb

Secondary Terminal: 4.5 in·lb


1.5 mm

2

…4.0 mm

2

Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m

Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m

0.35 in. (9 mm)

Control and Safety Monitor Inputs

#18 AWG…#10 AWG

1.0 mm

2

…4.0 mm

2

6.2 in·lb 0.7 N·m

0.35 in. (9 mm)

EMC Emission levels

Class A

Class A

EMC immunity levels

4 kV contact and 8 kV Air

10 V/m

2 kV

1 kV L-L, 2 kV L-N (Earth)

Overload Characteristics

10

I

2 t overload protection - 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 30 seconds

3

DeviceNet Specifications

Range 11…25V DC, 24V DC Nominal

167 mA @ 24V DC - 4.0 W

364 mA @ 11V DC - 4.0 W

Sensors Inputs 6* 50 mA - total 300 mA

367 mA @ 24V DC - 8.0 W

15 A for 250 μs

DeviceNet Communications

125, 250, 500 kbps

500 m (1630 ft) @ 125 kbps

200 m (656 ft) @ 250 kbps

100 m (328 ft) @ 500 kbps

10 AWG shielded motor cable, 5 m maximum, with 360° RF connections on both ends.

Required to meet conducted and radiated emissions requirements.

cULus (File No. E207834)

UL 508C

EN 50178, EN 61800-3, EN 60947-1

CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and EMC Directive 89/336/EEC

A-8

Specifications


Figure A.10 External Connections for Input Connector

Figure A.11 External Connections for DeviceNet™ Connector

Figure A.12 External Connections for Motor Connector

Pin 1: T1 - Black


Pin 3: T3

Pin 4: T2

- Red

- White

Figure A.13 External Connections for Control Brake Connector


Pin 2: L1 - Black

Pin 3: L2 - White

Figure A.14 External Connections for Dynamic Brake Connector


Pin 2: BR+ - Black

Pin 3: BR- - White


Figure A.15 External Connections for 120V AC Control Power

Specifications

A-9


Pin 2: L1 - Black

Pin 3: L2 - White

Figure A.16 Safety Monitor Input (SM1/SM2)

Figure A.17 External Connections for Safety Input Power (A1/A2)

Pin 1: SM2- White

Pin 2: SM1 - Brown



Pin 1: M - White

Pin 2: A1 - Brown

Pin 3: P - Black

Pin 4: A2 - Blue

Overload Curves

% of P132 (Motor NP Hertz) % of P132 (Motor NP Hertz)


A-10

Specifications


Line Voltage

Drive Ratings

380

460

IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor Ratings

Table A.1 IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor

Frequency

50

60

3-Phase kW Rating

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.0

—

—

—

—

—

3-Phase Hp Rating

—

—

—

—

—

0.5

1

2

3

5

Output Current (A)

1.4

2.3

4.0

6.0

7.6

1.4

2.3

4.0

6.0

7.6

Input Current (A)

2.15

3.80

6.40

9.00

12.40

1.85

3.45

5.57

8.20

12.5

Drive and

Motor Size kW

Part Number

400-480 Volt AC Input Drives

0.37 (0.5) 284R-360P500-M*

0.75 (1) 284R-360P500-M*

1.5 (2) 284R-360P500-M*

2.2 (3)

4 (5)

284R-120P1K2-M*

284R-120P1K2-M*

Resistance

Ohms ± 5%

Application Type 1

Continuous

Power kW

Max

Energy kJ

Max Braking

Torque % of

Motor

Braking

Torque % of

Motor

Duty

Cycle %

360

360

360

120

120

0.086

0.086

0.086

0.26

0.26

17

17

17

52

52

305%

220%

110%

197%

124%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

47%

23%

12%

24%

13%


Braking

Torque % of

Motor

150%

150%

110%

150%

124%

Duty

Cycle %

31%

15%

11%

16%

10%

Note: Always check the resistor ohms against minimum resistance for drive being used.

Note: Duty Cycle listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration. For constance regen at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed. Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque where possible. Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up to a maximum of 150%.

Specifications

ArmorConnect™ Three-Phase Power Media

Table 1.A Patchcords

0

Pin

Count

Assembly

Rating

Straight Female

Straight Male

Cat. No.

Right-Angle Female

Straight Male

Straight Female

Right-Angle Male

Right-Angle Female

Right-Angle Male

4-pin 600V, 25 A

280-PWRM35A-M

➊

280-PWRM35A-M

➊

280-PWRM35A-M

➊

280-PWRM35A-M

➊

0

➊ The cat. no. is incomplete as shown. For desired length, replace the symbol with: 05 —0.5 m (1.62 ft), 1—1 m (3.3 ft), 015—1.5 m (4.9 ft), 2—2 m (6.5 ft),

025—2.5 m (8.1 ft), 3—3 m (9.8 ft), 4—4 m (13.1 ft), 6—6 m (19.7 ft), 8—8 m (26.2 ft), 10—10 m (32.8 ft), 12—12 m (39.4 ft), or 14—14 m (45.9 ft).

Specifications

Mechanical

Coupling Nut

Housing

Insert

Cable Diameter

Electrical

Contacts

Cable

Cable Rating

Black Anodized Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel

Black PVC

Black PVC

0.775 in. +/- 0.12 in. (19.68 mm +/- 0.5 mm)

Assembly Rating

Copper Alloy with Gold over Nickel Plating

Black PVC, dual rated UL TC/Open Wiring and STOOW

600V AC/DC

600V @ 25 A, Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault: 65 kA when used with Class CC, T, or J type fuses or 100 A circuit breaker

Environmental

Enclosure Type Rating

Operating Temperature

Certifications

Standards Compliance

IP67, NEMA 4; IP69K 1200 psi washdown

UL Type TC 600V 90 °C Dry 75 °C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or

MTW 600V 90 °C or STOOW 105 °C 600V -

CSA STOOW 600V FT2

UL Listed (File No. E318496, Guide PVVA)

UL 2237

Pinout and Color Code

Face View Pinout

4-pin

Color Code

Female

3 Red

Male

1 Black

2 Green/Yellow Extended PIN 4 White

Approximate Dimensions

Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes and are subject to change.

Female straight

Male straight

88.9 (3.50)

88.9 (3.50)

38.6

(1.52)

38.6

(1.52)

Female 90 deg.

49.5 - 57.1

(1.95 - 2.25) Male 90 deg.

49.5 - 57.1

(1.95 - 2.25)

Example of a Patchcord

74.7

(2.94)

74.7

(2.94)

38.6

(1.52)

38.6

(1.52)

A-11

A-12

Specifications

Table 1.B Power Tees and Reducers

Description Assembly Rating Color Code

Cat. No.

0

M35, 3-Phase Power Tee, 4 pole 25 A A 280-T35

0

Specifications

Mechanical

Coupling Nut

Housing

Insert

Electrical

Contacts

Voltage

Black Anodized Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel

Black PVC

Black PVC

Assembly Rating

Environmental


Certifications



600V AC/DC

Trunk Tee: 25 A

Reducing Tee: Trunk 25 A/Drop 15 A

Reducer: 15 A

Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault 65 kA when used with

Class CC, T, or J type fuses or

100 A circuit breaker

IP67, NEMA 4; IP69K 1200 psi washdown


UL 2237



Trunk Tee: 25 A

4-pin

Color Code

(A)

Female

3 Red

Male

1 Black




Power Tee

108.0

(4.25)

#2-GREEN/YELLOW

#1-BLACK

KEYWAY

73.7 (2.90)

EXTENDED PIN 2

GREEN/YELLOW LEAD

#3 RED

#1 BLACK

#2 GREEN/YELLOW

#4 WHITE

#4-WHITE

#3-RED

19.0

(0.75)

FEMALE

38.0

(1.50)

WIRING DIAGRAM

Specifications

Table 1.C Power Receptacles (Male and Female)

Pin Count Assembly Rating

0

4-pin 10 AWG, 600V, 25 A

Color Code

Female

Cat. No.

Male

B 280-M35F-M1 280-M35M-M1

0

Specifications

Mechanical

Receptacle Shell Material

Insert

Electrical

Contacts

Cable Rating

Black Anodized Aluminum (female) and Zinc DieCast,

Black E-Coat (male) or 316 Stainless Steel

Black PVC



10 AWG, 600V @ 25 A

4-pin

Assembly Rating


600V AC/DC

4-pin: 10 AWG, 600V @ 25 A

Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault 65 kA when used with

Class CC, T, or J type fuses or

100 A circuit breaker

Environmental


Certifications


IP67, NEMA 4; 1200 psi washdown


UL 2237

Color Code

(B)

Female

3 Red

Male

1 Black




45.26

(1.782)

A-13

280-M35F-M1

7.62 +/-2.54

(0.30 +/- 0.10)

51.61

(2.032)

11.89 (0.468)

6.35 (0.25)

1000

(39.37)

280-M35M-M1

6.35 (0.25)

11.89 (0.468)

1000

(39.37)

A-14

Notes:

Specifications

Appendix

B

Bulletin 280G/281G CIP Information

Electronic Data Sheets

DOL Type Product Codes and Name

Strings

Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) files are specially formatted ASCII files that provide all of the information necessary for a configuration tool (e.g. RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet™) to access and alter the parameters of the device. The EDS file contains all of the device information: number of parameters, groupings, parameter name, minimum, maximum, and default values, units, data format and scaling.

EDS files for all the ArmorStart ® Distributed Motor Controller units are available from the Internet at

http://www.ab.com/networks/eds.

They may also be built automatically by some configuration tools since all of the information necessary for a basic EDS file may be extracted from the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller.

Product codes for DOL starters (and DOL Reversing starters) are based on the Overload relay current rating and the control power rating of the starter. The following table lists the product codes for the

Bulletin 280G Distributed Motor Controllers:

Table B.1 Bul. 280G Distributed Motor Controller Product Codes and Name

Strings

280G

Device

Type

➊

22

22

22

Product

Code

0x484

0x485

0x486

Contactor

Size Code

Overload

Current Rating

Control Power

Voltage

100C-12

100C-12

100C-23

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

120V AC

120V AC

120V AC

Table B.2 Bul. 280G Distributed Motor Controller Safety Product Codes and

Name Strings

280G

Device

Type

➊

22

22

22

Product

Code

0x4A1

0x4A2

0x4A3

Contactor

Size Code

Overload

Current Rating

Control Power

Voltage

100C-12

100C-12

100C-23

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

24V DC

24V DC

24V DC

➊ 22= Motor Starter

B-2

Bulletin 280G/281G CIP Information

DOL Reversing Type Product Codes and Name String

The following table lists the product codes for the Bulletin 281G

Distributed Motor Controllers:

Table B.3 Bul. 281G Distributed Motor Controller Product Codes and Name

Strings

281G

Device Type

➊

22

22

22

Product

Code

0x4C4

0x4C5

0x4C6

Contactor

Size Code

Overload

Current Rating

Control Power

Voltage

100C-12

100C-12

100C-23

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

120V AC

120V AC

120V AC

Table B.4 Bul. 281G Distributed Motor Controller Safety Product Codes and

Name Strings

281G

Device Type

➊

22

22

22

Product

Code

0x4Ee1

0x4E2

0x4E3

Contactor

Size Code

Overload

Current Rating

Control Power

Voltage

100C-12

100C-12

100C-23

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

24V DC

24V DC

24V DC

DeviceNet Objects


The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller supports the following

DeviceNet object classes:

Table B.5 DeviceNet Object Classes

Class

0x0001

0x0002

0x0003

0x0004

0x0005

0x0008

0x0009

0x000F

0x0010

0x001D

0x001E

0x0029

0x002B

0x002C

0x00B4

Object

Identity

Message Router

DeviceNet

Assembly

Connection

Discrete Input Point

Discrete Output Point

Parameter Object

Parameter Group Object

Discrete Input Group

Discrete Output Group

Control Supervisor

Acknowledge Handler

Overload Object

DN Interface Object

Identity Object — CLASS CODE

0x0001

Attribute ID

1


The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:

Table B.6 Identity Object Class Attributes

Access Rule

Get

Name

Revision

Data Type

UINT

B-3

Value

1

Identity Objects

Attribute ID Access Rule

1

2

3

Get

Get

Get

4 Get

5

6

7

8

9

10

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

A single instance of the Identity Object is supported. The following instance attributes are supported.

Table B.7 Identity Object Instance Attributes

Name

Vendor

Device Type

Product Code

Revision

Major Revision

Minor Revision

Data Type

UINT

UINT

UINT

Structure of:

USINT

USINT

Value

1

22

See Table B.1 and Table B.3

Indicates Software Firmware Revision Number

Status WORD

UDINT

Structure of:

USINT

STRING

USINT

UINT

USINT

Bit 0 — 0=not owned; 1=owned by master

Bit 2 — 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured

Bit 8 — Minor Recoverable fault

Bit 9 — Minor Unrecoverable fault

Bit 10 — Major Recoverable fault

Bit 11 — Major Unrecoverable fault

Unique Number for Each Device Serial Number

Product Name

String Length

ASCII String

State

Configuration Consistency Value

Heartbeat Interval

Product code specific

See Table B.1 and Table B.3

Returns the value “3=Operational”

Unique value depending on output of the parameter checksum algorithm.

In seconds. Default = 0

The following common services are implemented for the Identity

Object:

Table B.8 Identity Object Common Services

Service

Code

0x0E

0x05

0x10

Implemented for:

Class

Yes

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service

Name


Reset


Message Router — CLASS CODE

0x0002

No class or instance attributes are supported. The message router object exists only to rout explicit messages to other objects.

B-4


DeviceNet Object — CLASS CODE

0x0003

The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Object:

Table B.9 DeviceNet Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

Access Rule

Get

Name

Revision

Data Type

UINT

Value

2

A single instance (instance 1) of the DeviceNet Object is supported.

The following instance attributes are supported.

Table B.10 DeviceNet Object Instance Attributes


1 Get/Set

2 Get/Set

5

8

Get

Get

Name

Node Address

Allocation Info

Allocation Choice

Master Node Addr

MAC ID Switch Value

Data Type

USINT

USINT

Value

0 - 63

0=125K

1=250K

2=500K

Structure of:

BYTE

USINT

BOOL

Allocation_byte*

0…63 = address

255 = unallocated

0-63

*Allocation_byte Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Explicit messaging

Polled I/O

COS I/O

Cyclic I/O

Acknowledge Suppression

The following services are implemented for the DeviceNet Object:

Table B.11 DeviceNet Object Common Services

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

0x4B

0x4C


Class

Yes

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

No Yes

No Yes

Service

Name



Allocate_Master/Slave

_Connection_Set

Release_Master/Slave

_Connection_Set

Assembly Object — CLASS CODE

0x0004


B-5

The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object:

Table B.12 Assembly Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

2

Access Rule

Get

Name

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

Value

190

All of the various instances of the assembly object will support attribute 3. The following table summarizes the various instances that are supported:

Table B.13 DeviceNet Assembly Object Instance Attributes

Attribute ID

161

162

163

181

182

3

52

120

160

183

184

185

186

187

189

190


Consumed

Produced

Produced

Consumed

Required ODVA Consumed Instance

Required ODVA Produced Instance

Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Assembly

Default Consumed Instance for DOL

Produced Default Produced Instance for DOL

Consumed Standard Consumed Instance for DOL with Network Inputs

Produced Standard Produced Instance for DOL with Network Outputs

Produced

Consumed

User Inputs

Consumed Network Bits (a.k.a Network Inputs)

Produced

Produced

Produced

Produced

Consumed

Produced

Produced

Produced Network Bits (a.k.a. Network Outputs)

Trip Status Bits

Starter Status Bits

DeviceNet Status Bits

Starter Control Bits

Warning Status Bits

1779-ZCIO Bits

Custom Parameter Based

“Word-wise” I/O Assemblies

Table B.14 Custom Parameter Based “Word-Wise” (Produced) Assembly

Instance 120

Instance 120

Word Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0

1

2

3

0 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Prod Assy Word 0” Param (low byte)

1

Value of the parameter pointed to by “Prod Assy Word 0” Param (high byte)


3 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Prod Assy Word 1” Param (high byte)



6

Value of the parameter pointed to by “Prod Assy Word 3” Param (low byte)


B-6


“Word-wise” Bit-Packed

Assemblies

Assemblies whose instance numbers are 180…189 are all one word

(16 bits) long. They can be used “stand alone”, but their main use is to assemble information for EDS file parameters. These “word-wise” assemblies become the building blocks for the custom parameter-based “word-wise” assemblies described above. Note that these “word-wise” assemblies are designed for use with

DeviceLogix™, so their contents reflect the various words in the

DeviceLogix data table.

Table B.15 Instance 181 — This is a “Read Only” Status Assembly

Byte Bit 7

0

1

—

Bit 6

—

Instance 181 — Hardware Inputs 1…16

Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0

Reserved

Table B.16 Instance 182 — This is a “Read/Write” Control Assembly

Instance 182 — Consumed Network Inputs 1…16

Byte Bit 7

0

1

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Net Input

8

Net Input

7

Net Input

6

Net Input

5

Net Input

4

Net Input

3

Net Input

2

Net Input

1

Net Input

16

Net Input

15

Net Input

14

Net Input

13

Net Input

12

Net Input

11

Net Input

10

Net Input

9

Table B.17 Instance 183 This is a “Read Only” Status Assembly

Instance 183 — Produced Network Outputs 1…15



1 Reserved

Net Out

15

Net Out

14

Net Out

13

Net Out

12

Net Out

11

Net Out

10

Net Out 9


Byte Bit 7

0

1

—

—

Bit 6

In SS Flt

—

Instance 184 — Trip Status

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 5

Control

Power

— —

Bit 2

Phase

Loss

Bit 1

OL Trip

Hw Flt EEPROM — —

DNet

Power

Bit 0

Short

Circuit

Phase

Imbal

Standard Distributed Motor

Controller I/O Assemblies


B-7


Byte Bit 7

0

1

At Ref

—

Bit 6

—

—

Instance 185 — Starter Status

Bit 4 Bit 5

Net Ctl

Status

140M On

Ready

HOA

Stat.


Running

Rev

Running

Fwd

Keypad

Hand

—

Warning Tripped

— —


Instance 186 — DeviceNet Status


0 — — — I/O Idle I/O Flt Exp Flt I/O Cnxn Exp Cnxn

1 ZIP FLT ZIP4 CNX ZIP3 FLT ZIP2 CNX ZIP2 FLT ZIP2 CNX ZIP1 FLT ZIP1 CNX

Table B.21 Instance 187 This is a “Read/Write” Assembly

Byte Bit 7

0

1

Bit 6

User Out

B

User Out

A

— —

Instance 187 — Starter Control Bits


—

—

—

—

—

—

Bit 2

Fault

Reset

—

Bit 1 Bit 0

Run Rev Run Fwd

— —

Table B.22 Instance 189 This is a “Read-Only” Assembly

Byte Bit 7

0

1

—

—

Instance 189 — Warning Status Bits

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

IO

Warning

Control

Power

Warning

—

— HW Warn —

—

—

PL

Warning

—

Bit 1

—

Bit 0

—

DN Warn PI Warn

Standard Distributed Motor Controller IO Assemblies are available on all Starter Types.

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output (Consumed)

Assemblies

Table B.23 Instance 3 is the required output (consumed) assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile

Byte Bit 7

0 —

Bit 6

—

Instance 3 — ODVA Starter

Bit 5

—

Bit 4

—

Bit 3

—

Bit 2

—

Bit 1 Bit 0

— Run Fwd

B-8


Table B.24 Instance 160 is the default output (consumed) assembly for

Standard Distributed Motor Controllers

Instance 160 — Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 1

0 Reserved Reserved — — —

Bit 2

Fault

Reset

Bit 0

Run Rev Run Fwd

Table B.25 Instance 162 is the standard output (consumed) assembly with

Network Inputs

Instance 162 — Standard Consumed Starter with Network Inputs


0 Reserved Reserved — — —

Fault

Reset

Run Rev Run Fwd

1 Net In 8 Net In 7 Net In 6 Net In 5 Net In 4 Net In 3 Net In 2 Net In 1

2 Net In 16 Net In 15 Net In 14 Net In 13 Net In 12 Net In 11 Net In 10 Net In 9

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input (Produced)

Assemblies

Table B.26 Instance 52 is the required input (produced) assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile

Byte Bit 7

— —

Bit 6

—

Instance 52 — ODVA Starter

Bit 5

—

Bit 4

—

Bit 3

—

Bit 2

Running

Bit 1

—

Table B.27 Instance 161 is the default input (produced) assembly for

Standard Distributed Motor Controllers

Bit 0

Fault

Instance 161 — Default Producted Standard Distributed Motor Controller


0 Reserved 140M On Reserved Ready

Running

Rev

Running

Fwd

Warning Tripped

1 Reserved Reserved User In 5 User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0


Table B.28 Instance 163 is the standard input (produced) assembly with

Network Outputs and ZIP CCV

B-9

Instance 163 — Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs


0 Not Used 140M On Not Used Ready

Running

Rev

Running

Fwd

Warning Tripped

4

5

1 Not Used Not Used User In 5 User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0


3

Logic

Enabled

Net Out

15

Net Out

14

Net Out

13

Net Out

12

ZIP CCV (Low)

ZIP CCV (High)

Net Out

11

Net Out

10

Net Out 9

Table B.29 Instance 190 is the 1999-ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly

Instance 190 — 1799-ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly


0

1

Running

Rev

Running

Fwd

Reserved

Logic

Enabled

Warning Tripped Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0

Reserved 140M On HOA

2 Reserved

User Out

B

User Out

A

Run Rev Run Fwd

5

6

3 Reserved


ZIP CCV (Low)

ZIP CCV (High)

5

6

7

8

9

12

13

14

15

16

B-10


Connection Object — CLASS CODE

0x0005

No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object

Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported, instances

1, 2, and 4 from the group 2 predefined master/slave connection set, instances 5 and 6 are available through explicit UCMM connections.

Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit

Message Connection. The following instance 1 attributes is supported:

Table B.30 Connection Object Instance 1 Attributes

Attribute

ID

Access

Rule

Name

Data

Type

1

2

3

4

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

State

Instance Type

Transport Class Trigger

Produced Connection ID

Consumed Connection ID

Initial Comm Characteristics

Produced Connection Size

Consumed Connection Size

Expected Packet Rate

Watchdog Action

Produced Connection Path Length

Produced Connection Path

Consumed Connection Path Length

Consumed Connection Path

USINT

USINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

Value

0=nonexistant

1=configuring

3=established

4=timed out

0=Explicit

Message

0x83 — Server,

Transport Class 3

10xxxxxx011 xxxxxx = node

address

10xxxxxx100 xxxxxx = node

address

0x22

0x61

0x61 in ms

01 = auto delete

03 = deferred delete

0

Empty

0

Empty


1

4

5

8

9

6

7

12

13

14

15

16

2

3

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get/Set

Name

State


Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled I/O

Message Connection. The following instance 2 attributes are supported:

B-11


Instance Type








Watchdog Action





Data Type

USINT

USINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

Value

0=nonexistant

1=configuring

3=established

4=timed out

1= I/O Connection

0x82 — Server, Transport Class 2

(If alloc_choice != polled and ack suppression is enabled then value = 0x80)

01111xxxxxx xxxxxx=node

address

10xxxxxx101 xxxxxx=node

address

0x21

0 to 8

0 to 8 in ms

0=transition to timed out

1=auto delete

2=auto reset

8

21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03

8

21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03

B-12

Attribute ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12

13

14

15

16


Access Rule

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State/

Cyclic I/O Message Connection. The following instance 4 attributes are supported:


Name Data Type

State

Instance Type








Watchdog Action





USINT

USINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

Value

0=nonexistant

1=configuring

3=established

4=timed out

1=I/O Connection

0x00 (Cyclic, unacknowledged)

0x03 (Cyclic, acknowledged)

0x10 (COS, unacknowledged)

0x13 (COS, acknowledged)

01101xxxxxx xxxxxx=node

address

10xxxxxx101 xxxxxx=node

address

0x02 (acknowledged)

0x0F (unacknowledged)

0 to 8

0 to 8 in ms

0=transition to timed out

1=auto delete

2=auto reset

8

21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03

8

21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03


1 Get

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

12

13

14

15

16


1

2

3

4

5

13

14

15

16

6

7

8

9

12

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get


B-13

Instances 5 and 6 are available group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated through the UCMM. The following attributes are supported:

Table B.33 Connection Object Instance 5-6 Attributes

Name

State

Instance Type








Watchdog Action





Data Type

USINT

USINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

Value

0=nonexistant

1=configuring

3=established

4=timed out

0=Explicit

Message

0x83 — Server, Transport Class 3

Depends on message group and Message ID


0x33 (Group 3)

0

0XFFFF in ms

01 = auto delete


0

Empty

0

Empty

Instances 8-11 are ZIP Consumers. The following instance attributes will be supported:

Table B.34 Connection Object Instances 8-11 Attributes

Name

State

Instance Type








Watchdog Action





Data Type

USINT

USINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

Value

0=nonexistant

1=configuring

3=established

1=I/O Connection


FFFF (not producing data)

01101xxxxxx xxxxxx=node address

0xF0 (unacknowledged)

0

8 in milliseconds

2=auto reset

0

0

8

21 0E 03 25 01 00 30 02

B-14


Discrete Input Point Object —

CLASS CODE 0x0008

The following services are implemented for the Connection Object:

Table B.35 Connection Objects Common Services

Service

Code

0x05

0x0E

0x10


Class

No

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service

Name

Reset



The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input

Point Object:

Table B.36 Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

2

Access Rule

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

Value

2

6

Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances contain the following attributes:

Table B.37 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes


3

115

116

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Value

Force Enable

Force Value

Data Type

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

Value

0=OFF, 1=ON

0=Disable, 1=Enabl;e

0=OFF, 1=ON

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete

Input Point Object:

Table B.38 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Common Services

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10


Class

Yes

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name



Discrete Output Point Object —


➊

Attribute ID

6

7

8

3

5

113

114

115

116

Access Rule

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

"

Get/Set

"

Get/Set

Get/Set


B-15

The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output

Point Object:

Table B.39 Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

2

Access Rule

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

Value

1

2

Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported. The following table summarizes the DOP instances:

Table B.40 Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes

Instance ID

1

2

3

4

Name

Run Fwd Output 0029 – 01 – 03

Run Rev Output 0029 – 01 – 04

Reserved

Reserved

Alternate

Mapping

none none

Description

Run Forward output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator

Run Reverse output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator

—

All instances contain the following attributes.

Name

Value

Fault Action

Fault Value

Idle Action

Idle Value

Pr Fault Action

Pr Fault Value

Force Enable

Force Value

Data Type

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

Value

0=OFF, 1=ON

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

0=OFF, 1=ON

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

0=OFF, 1=ON

0=Pr Fault Value attribute, 1=Ignore

0=OFF, 1=ON

0=Disable, 1=Enable

0=OFF, 1=ON

➊

For DOP instances 1 and 2, attributes 113 and 114 have “Get” only access, and their values are always 0.


Output Point Object:

Table B.41 Discrete Output Object Common Services

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10


Class

Yes

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



B-16


DOP Instances 1 and 2 Special Behavior

Besides the sources that can affect output points 3 and 4, DOPs 1 and

2 can be affected by keypad inputs since they double as the Run

Forward and Run Reverse outputs. This adds complexity to their behavior, so their behavior is defined in this section separately.

The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 1

and 2

Figure B.1 DOP Instances 1 and 2

Power Off

Non-Existant

Power Up

Auto State = Auto Init

Auto

Keyad "Hand"

Button Pressed

Hand State = Hand Stop

Keyad "Auto"

Button Pressed


Hand


The following State Transition Diagram is used in Auto State for

Unbound DOP Instances 1 and 2

B-17

Figure B.2 Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 and 2

Auto Init

DNet Fault

Protection Fault

DNet Fault DNet Fault Idle

DNet

Idle

Ready

Receive Data

DNet Fault

Connection Transitions to Established

Protection Fault Reset

Protection F

Protection Fault

Protection Fault

Run

B-18


Parameter Object — CLASS CODE

0x000F

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object:

Table B.42 Parameter Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

2

8

9

Access Rule

Get

Get

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Parameter Class Descriptor

Configuration Assembly Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

WORD

UINT

The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of Distributed Motor Controller. There is a standard set of instances reserved (1-99) for all starters. These instances are followed by a unique set of instances for each starter type (Across the Line,

Soft start, or Inverter type).

The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes:

Table B.43 Parameter Object Instance Attributes


1

2

Get/Set

Get

3

7

8

9

10

11

4

5

6

15

16

17

18

12

13

14

19

20

21

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Name

Value

Link Path Size

Link Path

Descriptor

Data Type

Data Size

Parameter Name String

Units String

Help String

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Scaling Multiplier

Scaling Divisor

Scaling Base

Scaling Offset

Multiplier Link

Divisor Link

Base Link

Offset Link

Decimal Precision

Data Type

Specified in Descriptor

USINT

Array of:

BYTE

EPATH

WORD

EPATH

USINT

SHORT_STRING

SHORT_STRING

SHORT_STRING




UINT

UINT

UINT

INT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT


B-19

The following common services are implemented for the Parameter

Object:

Table B.44 Parameter Object Common Services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10

0x01


Class

Yes

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service Name



Get_Attributes_All

Parameter Group Object — CLASS

CODE 0x0010

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object:

Table B.45 Parameter Group Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

2

Access Rule

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

All Bulletin 280G/281G Motor Starters have the following instances of the parameter group object:

• Instance 1 = DeviceLogix Parameters

• Instance 2 = DeviceNet Parameters

• Instance 3 = Starter Protection Parameters

• Instance 4 = User I/O Parameters

• Instance 5 = Miscellaneous Setup Parameters

• Instance 6 = ZIP Parameters

• Instance 7 = Starter Display

• Instance 8 = Starter Setup

The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances:

Table B.46 Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes

Attribute ID

1

2

3

4 n

Access Rule

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Name

Group Name String

Number of Members

1 st

Parameter

2 nd

Parameter

Nth Parameter

Data Type

SHORT_STRING

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

B-20


Discrete Input Group Object —

Class CODE 0x001D


Group Object:

Table B.47 Parameter Group Object Service Common Services

Service Code

0x0E


Class

Yes

Instance

Yes

Service Name


No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object.

A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported. It contains the following attributes:

Table B.48 Discrete Input Instance Attributes


3

4

6

7

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Number of Instances

Binding

Off_On_Delay

On_Off_Delay

Data Type Value

USINT 4

Array of UINT List of DIP instances

UINT in μsec

UINT in μsec


Input Group Object:

Table B.49 Discrete Input Group Object Common Services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No


Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name




B-21

Discrete Output Group Object —

CLASS CODE 0x001E

Attribute ID

3

4

6

104

105

Access Rule

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group

Object.

A single instance of the Discrete Output Group Object is supported. It contains the following attributes:

Table B.50 Discrete Output Instance Attributes

Name

Number of Instances

Binding

Command

Network Status Override

Comm Status Override

Data Type

USINT

Array of UINT

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

Value

4 for DOL

List of DOP instances; 1, 2, 3, 4

0=idle; 1=run

0=No Override (go to safe state)

1=Override (run local logic)

0=No override (go to safe state)

1=Override (run local logic)


Output Group Object:

Table B.51 Discrete Output Group Common Services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No


Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name



B-22


Control Supervisor Object -CLASS

CODE 0x0029

No class attributes are supported.

The following instance attributes are supported:

A single instance (instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object will be supported.


3

*4

7

*8

9

10

12

100

101

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

115

124

130

131

151

152

153

154

155

156

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Table B.52 Control Supervisor Instance Attributes

Name

Run 1

Run 2

Running 1

Running 2

Ready

Tripped

Fault Reset

Keypad Mode

Keypad Disable

Warning Status

Trip Enable

Trip Reset Mode

Trip Reset Level

Base Enclosure

Base Options

Wiring Options

Starter Enclosure

Starter Options

Last Pr Trip

Data Type

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

WORD

WORD

BOOL

USINT

WORD

WORD

WORD

WORD

WORD

UINT

Value

These Run outputs also map to DOP instances 1 and 2.

Status of RUN FWD contact

Status of RUN REV contact

Device not faulted

Device faulted

0->1 = Trip Reset

0=Maintained; 1=Momentary

0=Not Disabled; 1=Disabled

Bits 0-4 = reserved

Bit 5 = CP Warning

Bit 6 = IO Warning

Bit 7 = reserved

Bit 8 = reserved

Bit 9 = DN Warning

Bits 10-12 = reserved

Bit 13 = HW Warning


Bit enumerated trip enable word

0=manual; 1=auto

0 – 100%; default = 75

Bit 0 = IP67

Bits 1-15 reserved

Bit 0 = reserved

Bit 1 = reserved


Bits 3-7 = reserved

Bit 8 = 10A Base

Bit 9 = 25A Base

Bit 10-15 = reserved

Bit 0 = reserved

Bit 1 = reserved

Bit 2= 28xG Gland


Bit 0 = IP67

Bits 1-15 reserved

Bit 0 = Full Keypad


Bits 2-15 reserved

See Parameter 61

Acknowledge Handler Object —

CLASS CODE 0x002b


The following common services are implemented for the Control

Supervisor Object:

B-23

Table B.53 Control Supervisor Object Common Services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10


Class

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name



No class attributes are supported for the Acknowledge Handler

Object.

A single instance (instance 1) of the Acknowledge Handler Object is supported. The following instance attributes are supported:

Table B.54 Acknowledge Handler Instance Attributes


1

2

Get/Set

Get

3 Get

Name

Acknowledge Timer

Retry Limit

COS Producing Connection

Instance

Data Type

UINT

USINT

UINT

Value

milliseconds

1

4

The following common services are implemented for the

Acknowledge Handler Object:

Table B.55 Acknowledge Handler Common Services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10


Class

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name



B-24


Overload Object — CLASS CODE

0x002c

No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object.

A single instance (instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported for

Bulletin 280G/281G:

Table B.56 Overload Object Instance Attributes


3 Get/Set

Name

FLA Setting

4 Get/Set Trip Class

Data Type

BOOL

USINT

5

7

8

9

10

190

192

193

194

195

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Average Current

% Thermal Utilized

Current L1

Current L2

Current L3

FLA Setting Times 10

Avg. Current Times 10

Current L1 Times 10

Current L2 Times 10

Current L3 Times 10

UINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

BOOL

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT xxx.x Amps

The following common services are implemented for the Overload

Object:

Table B.57 Acknowledge Handler Object Common Services

Value

xxx.x Amps

1=10

2=15

3=20 xxx.x Amps xxx% FLA xxx.x Amps xxx.x Amps xxx.x Amps xxx.x Amps xxx.x Amps

Service Code

0x0E

0x10


Class

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name




B-25

DeviceNet Interface Object -CLASS

CODE 0x00B4


7

8

9

10

13

15

16

17

19

23

24

30

50

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

This “vendor specific” object has no class attributes.

A single instance (instance 1) of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported:

Name

Prod Assy Word 0

Prod Assy Word 1

Prod Assy Word 2

Prod Assy Word 3

Starter COS Mask

Autobaud Enable

Consumed Assy

Produced Assy

Set To Defaults

I/O Produced Size

I/O Consumed Size

DNet Voltage

PNB COS Mask

Table B.58 DeviceNet Interface Object Instance Attribute

Data Type

USINT

USINT

USINT

USINT

WORD

BOOL

USINT

USINT

BOOL

USINT

USINT

UINT

WORD

Min/Max Default

0…108

0…108

1

5

0…108

0…108

6

7

0…0xFFFF 0xFFFF

0…1

0…185

100…187

0…1

1

160

161

0

0…8

0…3 xx.xx

0 to 0x00FF

—

—

—

0

Description

Defines Word 0 of Assy 120




Change of state mask for starter bits

1= enabled; 0 = disabled

3, 121, 160, 162, 182, 187

52, 121, 161, 163, 181-187,189,190

0=No action; 1=Reset

Size of I/O Produced Data in Bytes

Size of I/O Consumed Data in Bytes

DeviceNet Voltage xx.xx Volts

Change of state mask for PNBs

The following common services are implemented for the DeviceNet

Interface Object:

Table B.59 DeviceNet Interface Object Common Services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10


Class

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name



B-26

Notes:


Appendix

C

Bulletin 284G CIP Information

1

Electronic Data Sheets

VFD Type Product Codes and

Name Strings

Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) files are specially formatted ASCII files that provide all of the information necessary for a configuration tool (e.g.,

RSNetWorx

™ for DeviceNet™ Revision 3.21 Service Pack 2 or later) to access and alter parameters of the device. The EDS file contains all of the device information: number of parameter, groupings, parameter name, minimum, maximum, and default values, units, data format, and scaling.

EDS files for all the ArmorStart® Distributed Motor Controllers units are available from the Internet at www.ab.com/networks/eds.

They may also be built automatically by some configuration tools since much of the information necessary for an EDS file may be extracted from the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller.

Product codes for the Bulletin 284G variable frequency drives are based on the Horse Power Rating and Supply Voltage rating of the Distributed Motor

Controller. Table C.1 lists the product codes and name strings for the

Bulletin 284G Distributed Motor Controllers:

Table C.1 Bulletin 284G Product Codes and Name Strings

284G

Device

Type

➊

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

Product

Code

0x592

0x594

0x596

0x597

0x598

0x599

0x59A

0x59B

Hp

0.50

1

2

3

5

7.5

10

15

Supply Voltage

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

Name String

ArmorStart 284G PF40 480V 0.5 Hp

ArmorStart 284G PF40 480V 1 Hp




ArmorStart 1000 PF40 480V 7.5 Hp

ArmorStart 1000 PF40 480V 10 Hp


Table C.2 Bulletin 284G Safety Product Codes and Name Strings

284G

Device

Type

➊

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

Product

Code

0x5C2

0x5C4

0x5C6

0x5C7

0x5C8

0x5C9

0x5CA

0x5CB


Hp

0.50

1

2

3

5

7.5

10

15

Supply Voltage

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

480V AC

Name String

ArmorStart 284G PF40 480V 0.5 Hp





ArmorStart 1000 PF40 480V 7.5 Hp



Drive Type

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

Drive Type

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

PF40

C-2

Bulletin 284G CIP Information

DeviceNet Objects

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller supports the following

DeviceNet object classes:

Table C.3 DeviceNet Object Classes

Class

0x0001

0x0002

0x0003

0x0004

0x0005

0x0008

0x0009

0x000F

0x0010

0x001D

0x001E

0x0029

0x002B

0x00B4

Object

Identity

Message Router

DeviceNet

Assembly

Connection

Discrete Input Point

Discrete Output Point

Parameter Object

Parameter Group Object

Discrete Input Group

Discrete Output Group

Control Supervisor

Acknowledge Handler

DN Interface Object

Identity Object — CLASS CODE

0x0001

The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:

Table C.4 Identity Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

Access Rule

Get

Name

Revision

Data Type

UINT

Value

1

Identity Object

Message Router — CLASS CODE

0x0002


C-3

A single instance of the Identity Object is supported. The following instance attributes are supported:

4

Table C.5 Identity Object Instance Attributes

Attribute

ID

1

2

3

Access

Rule

Get

Get

Get

Get

Name

Vendor

Device Type

Product Code

Revision

Major Revision

Minor Revision

Data Type

UINT

UINT

UINT

Structure of:

USINT

USINT

5

6

Get Status WORD

1

22

See Table C.1

Value

Indicates Software Firmware

Revision Number

Bit 0: 0 = not owned; 1 = owned by master

Bit 2: 0 = Factory Defaulted;

1 = Configured

Bit 8: Minor Recoverable fault

Bit 9: Minor Unrecoverable fault

Bit 10: Major Recoverable fault

Bit 11: Major Unrecoverable fault

Unique Number for Each Device

7

8

9

10

Get

Get

Serial Number

Product Name

String Length

ASCII String

State Get

Get

Configuration

Consistency

Value

Get/Set Heartbeat Interval

UDINT

Structure of:

USINT

STRING

USINT

UINT

USINT

Product code specific

See Table C.1.

Returns the value

3 = Operational

Unique value depending on output of the parameter checksum algorithm.

In seconds. Default = 0

The following common services are implemented for the Identity

Object:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x05

0x10

Table C.6 Identity Object Common Services

Class

No

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service

Name


Reset


No class or instance attributes are supported. The message router object exists only to rout explicit messages to other objects.

C-4


DeviceNet Object — CLASS CODE

0x0003

The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Object:

Table C.7 DeviceNet Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

Access Rule

Get

Name

Revision

Data Type

UINT

A single instance (Instance 1) of the DeviceNet Object will be supported. The following instance attributes are supported:

Value

2

Table C.8 DeviceNet Object Instance Attributes

Attribute

ID

1

Access

Rule

Get/Set

Name

Node Address

Data Type

USINT

2 Get/Set Baud Rate USINT

5 Get

8 Get

➊

See Table C.9

Allocation Info

• Allocation Choice

• Master Node Addr

MAC ID Switch Value

Structure of:

• BYTE

• USINT

BOOL

Value

0…63

0 = 125K

1 = 250K

2 = 500K

Allocation_byte

➊

0…63 = address

255 = unallocated

0…63

Table C.9 Allocation_byte

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Explicit messaging

Polled I/O

COS I/O

Cyclic I/O

Acknowledge Suppression

The following services are implemented for the DeviceNet Object:

Table C.10 DeviceNet Object Common Services

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

0x4B

0x4C

Implemented for

Class

Yes

No

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



Allocate_Master/Slave _Connection_Set

Release_Master/Slave _Connection_Set


C-5

Assembly Object — CLASS CODE

0x0004

The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object

Table C.11 DeviceNet Assembly Object:

Attribute ID

2

Access Rule

Get

Name

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

Value

190

All of the various instances of the assembly object will support

Attribute 3. Table C.12 summarizes the various instances that are supported

167

183

184

185

186

170

171

181

182

187

188

189

190

163

164

165

166

Table C.12 DeviceNet Assembly Object Instance Attributes:

Attribute

ID

3

52

120

160

161

162


Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance

Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance

Produced Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Assembly

Consumed Default Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart units

Produced Default Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart units

Consumed

Standard Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network

Inputs

Produced

Standard Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network

Outputs

Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type units

Produced Default Produced Instance for Inverter type units

Consumed

Produced

Standard Consumed Instance for Inverter type units with Network

Inputs

Standard Produced Instance for Inverter type units with Network

Outputs

Consumed Power Flex Native Format Consumed Instance

Produced Power Flex Native Format Produced Instance

Produced User Inputs

Consumed Consumed Network Bits (a.k.a Network Inputs)

Produced Produced Network Bits (a.k.a. Network Outputs)

Produced Trip Status Bits

Produced Starter Status Bits

Produced DeviceNet Status Bits

Consumed Starter Control Bits

Consumed Drive Control Bits

Produced Warning Status Bits

Produced 1799 - ZCIO Bits

C-6


Custom Parameter Based Word-

Wise I/O Assembly

Table C.13 CustomParameter Based Word Wise (Produced) Assembly

Instance

Instance 120

Word Byte

0

1

2

3


0 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 0 Param (low byte)

1 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 0 Param (high byte)







Word-Wise Bit-Packed Assemblies

Assemblies whose instance numbers are 180...189 are all one word

(16 bits) long. They can be used stand-alone, but their main use is to assemble information for EDS file parameters. These Word-Wise assemblies become the building blocks for the Custom Parameter

Based Word-Wise assembly described in Table C.13.

Table C.14 Instance 181 — Hardware Inputs 1…16

Instance 181 — This is a Read Only Status Assembly

Byte

0

1

Bit 7

—

—

Bit 6

—

—


Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0

— — — — — —

Table C.15 Instance 182 — Consumed Network Inputs 1…16

Instance 182 — This is a Read/Write Control Assembly

Byte

0

1

Bit 7

Net Input

8

Net Input

16

Bit 6

Net Input

7

Net Input

15

Bit 5

Net Input

6

Net Input

14

Bit 4

Net Input

5

Net Input

13

Bit 3

Net Input

4

Net Input

12

Bit 2

Net Input

3

Net Input

11

Bit 1

Net Input

2

Net Input

10

Bit 0

Net Input

1

Net Input

9

Table C.16 Instance 183 — Produced Network Outputs 1…15


Byte

0

1

Bit 7

Net Out 8

Reserved

Bit 6

Net Out

7

Net Out

15

Bit 5

Net Out

6

Net Out

14

Bit 4

Net Out

5

Net Out

13

Bit 3

Net Out

4

Net Out

12

Bit 2

Net Out

3

Net Out

11

Bit 1

Net Out

8

Net Out

10

Bit 0

Net Out

1

Net Out

9


Table C.17 Instance 184 — Trip Status


Byte

0

1

Bit 7

Over

Temp

Misc.

Fault

Bit 6

IO Fault

Retries

Bit 5

Control

Power

HW Fault

Bit 4

Stall

EEPROM

Bit 3

Gnd

Fault

DC Bus

C-7

Bit 2

Phase

Short

Int

Comm

Bit 1

OL Trip

DNet Flt

Bit 0

140M

Trip

Over

Current

Table C.18 Instance 185 — Starter Status


Byte

0

1


At

Reference

Net Ref

Status

Net Ctl

Status

Ready

Reserved

Contactor 1

➊

140M

On

HOA

Status

➊

Refers to control brake contactor status.

Running

Rev

KP Hand

Bit 2

Running

Fwd

KP Jog

Bit 1

Alarm

DrvOpto2

Bit 0

Tripped

DrvOpto1

Table C.19 Instance 186 — DeviceNet Status


Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3

0 — —

1 ZIP 4 Flt

—

ZIP 4

Cnx

ZIP 3 Flt

I/O Idle I/O Flt

ZIP 3

Cnx

ZIP 2 Flt

Bit 2 Bit 1

Exp Flt I/O Cnxn

ZIP 2

Cnx

ZIP 1 Flt

Bit 0

Exp

Cnxn

ZIP 1

Cnx

Instance 187 — This is a Read/Write Assembly

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

0

1

Reserved

—

Reserved

—

—

—

Jog Rev

—

Bit 3

Jog Fwd

—

Bit 2

Fault

Reset

—

Bit 1 Bit 0

Run Rev Run Fwd

— —

Instance 188 — This is a Read/Write Assembly

Byte

0

1

Bit 7

—

—

Bit 6

Freq

Select 3

—

Bit 5

Freq

Select 2

—

Bit 4

Freq

Select 1

—


Decel 2 Decel 1 Accel 2 Accel 1

Drv In 4 Drv In 3 Drv In 2 Drv In 1

Table C.20 Instance 189 This is a “Read Only” assembly

Instance 189 Warning Status Bits

Byte

0

1

Bit 7

Reserved

—

Bit 6

I/O

Warning

—

Bit 5

Control

Power

Warning

HW

Warn

Bit 4

—

—

Bit 3

—

—

Bit 2

—

—

Bit 1

—

Bit 0

—

DN Warn PI Warn

C-8


Table C.21 Instance 190 is the 1999-ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly

Instance 190 1799-ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly


5

6

0

1

Running

Rev

Reserved

Running

Fwd

Logic

Enable

Warning Tripped

2

3

Drive In 4 Drive In 3 Drive In 2

Drive In

1

Reserved

Input 3

Reserved

Reserved

Input 2

Reserved

Input 1

140M On

Run Rev

Input 0

HOA

Run

Fwd

Jog Rev Jog Fwd

4 Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6

Net Out

5

Net Out 4

ZIP CCV (Low)

ZIP CCV (High)

Net Out 3 Net Out 2

Net Out

1

Standard Distributed Motor

Controller I/O Assemblies

Standard Distributed Motor Controller I/O Assemblies are available on all Starter Types.

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output (Consumed)

Assemblies

Instance 3 is the required output (consumed) assembly defined in the

DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile.

Byte

0

Table C.22 ODVA Starter

Bit 7

—

Bit 6

—

Bit 5

—

Bit 4

—

Bit 3

—

Bit 2

—

Bit 1

—

Bit 0

Run Fwd

Instance 160 is the default output (consumed) assembly for Bulletin

280G/281G Distributed Motor Controllers

Byte

0

Table C.23 Instance 160 — Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor

Controller.


Reserved Reserved

Bit 2

Fault

Reset

Bit 1 Bit 0

Run Rev Run Fwd

Instance 162 is the standard output (consumed) assembly with

Network Inputs for Bulletin 280G/281G Distributed Motor

Controllers

Table C.24 Standard Consumed Starter with Network Inputs.

0

1

2


Reserved Reserved

Fault

Reset

Run Rev Run Fwd

Net In 8 Net In 7 Net In 6 Net In 5 Net In 4 Net In 3 Net In 2 Net In 1



C-9

Bulletin 284G Distributed Motor Controller I/O Assemblies

Bulletin 284G Distributed Motor Controller IO Assemblies are available ONLY on the Bulletin 284G Distributed Motor Controller.

Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output (Consumed) Assemblies

Instance 164 is the default output (consumed) assembly for Inverter

Type Distributed Motor Controllers

Table C.25 Instance 164 — Default Consumed Inverter Type Distributed

Motor Controller.

1

2

3

Byte

0


Reserved Reserved

Drive In 4 Drive In 3

—

Drive In 2

Jog Rev

Drive In 1

Jog

Fwd

Decel

2

Fault

Reset

Decel 1



Run Rev

Accel 2

Run

Fwd

Accel 1

Instance 166 is the standard output (consumed) assembly for Inverter

Type Distributed Motor Controllers with network inputs

Table C.26 Instance 166 — Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network

Inputs


4

5

2

3

0 Reserved Reserved

1 Drive In 4 Drive In 3

—

Drive In

2

Jog Rev

Drive In

1

Jog Fwd

Decel

2

Fault

Reset

Decel

1



Run Rev

Accel

2

Run Fwd

Accel

1



Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input (Produced)

Assemblies

Instance 52 is the required input (produced) assembly defined in the

DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile

Byte

—

Table C.27 Instance 52 — ODVA Starter.

Bit 7

—

Bit 6

—

Bit 5

—

Bit 4

—

Bit 3

—

Bit 2

Running

Bit 1

—

Bit 0

Fault

C-10


Instance 161 is the default input (produced) assembly for the Bulletin

280G/281G Distributed Motor Controller

Byte

0

1

Table C.28 Instance 161 — Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor.

Bit 7

—

—

Bit 6

140M

On

—

Bit 5

—

User In

5

Bit 4

Ready

Bit 3

Running

Rev

Bit 2

Running

Fwd

Bit 1

—

Bit 0

Tripped

User In

4

User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0

Instance 163 is the standard input (produced) assembly with Network

Outputs for the Bulletin 280G/281G Distributed Motor Controller

Byte

0

1

2

3

4

5

Table C.29 Instance 163 — Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs and ZIP CCV.

Bit 7

Net Out

8

Logic

Enable

Stat

Bit 6

140M On

Net Out

7

Bit 5

User In

5

Net Out

6

Bit 4

Ready

Bit 3

Running

Rev

Bit 2

Running

Fwd

Bit 1

Warning

Bit 0

Tripped

User In

4

Net Out

5

User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1

Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1

Net Out

15

Net Out

14

Net Out

13

Net Out

12

Net Out

11

Net Out

10

Net Out 9

ZIP Device Value Key (Low)

ZIP Device Value Key (High)

Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller Input (Produced)

Assemblies

Instance 165 is the default input (produced) assembly for Inverter

Type Distributed Motor Controllers

1

2

3

Byte

0

Table C.30 Default Produced Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller.


At

Reference

Reserved

140M On

Contactor 1

➊

Net Ctl

Status

User In

5

Ready

User In

4

Running

Rev

User In 3

Running

Fwd

User In 2



Alarm

User In 1

Tripped

User In 0

➊



Instance 167 is input (produced) assembly for Inverter Type

Distributed Motor Controllers with Network Outputs

C-11

5

6

7

2

3

4

Byte

0

1

Table C.31 Instance 167 —Produced Inverter Type Starter with Network

Bit 7

At

Reference

Bit 6

140M On

Bit 5

Net Ctl

Status

Bit 4

Ready

Bit 3

Running

Rev

Bit 2

Running

Fwd

Bit 1

Alarm

Bit 0

Tripped

Reserved

Contactor 1

➊

User In 5 User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0




Net Out 15

Net Out

14

Net Out

13

Net Out

12

Net Out

11

Net Out

10

Net Out 9

ZIP Device Value Key (Low)

ZIP Device Value Key (High)

➊


Power Flex Native Assemblies

These assembly instances have the same data format as the Power

Flex Drives with a DNet adapter.

Power Flex Native Consumed Assembly

Instance 170 is the Power Flex Native Format Consumed Assembly

Byte

0

1

2

3

Table C.32 Instance 170 — Power Flex Native Format Consumed Assembly.

Bit 7 Bit 6

MOP Inc reserved

MOP Dec

Freq Select

3


Direction Cmd

Freq Select

2

Freq

Select 1

Flt Reset

Decel

2

Comm Frequency Command (Low)

Comm Frequency Command (High)

Jog

Decel

1

Start

Accel

2

Stop

Accel

1

C-12


Table C.33 Logic Command

Accel 2

0

0

1

1

Decel 2

0

0

1

1

Freq Select 3

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

Accel 1

0

1

0

1

Decel 1

0

1

0

1

Freq Select 2

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

Freq Select 1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

Description

No Command

Accel 1 Enable

Accel 2 Enable

Hold Accel Rate Selected

No Command

Decel 1 Enable

Decel 2 Enable

Hold Decel Rate Selected

No Command

Freq Source = P136 (Start Source)

Freq Source = P169 (Internal Freq)

Freq Source = Comms

P170 (Preset Freq 0)




Power Flex Native Produced Assembly

Instance 171 is the Power Flex Native Format Produced Assembly.

Table C.34 Instance 171 — PowerFlex Native Format Produced Assembly

1

2

3

Byte

0

Bit 7

Faulted

Drv In 4

Stat

Bit 6

Alarm

Drv In 3

Stat

Bit 5

Deceling

Drv In 2 Stat

Bit 4

Acceling Rot Fwd

Drv In 1

Bit 3

Param

Locked

Drive Error Code (low)

Drive Error Code (high)


Cmd

Fwd

Ctl fm

Net

Running Ready

Ref fm Net At Ref


C-13

Connection Object — CLASS CODE

0x0005

No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object.

Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported, Instances

1, 2, and 4 from the Group 2 predefined master/slave connection set,

Instances 5 and 6 are available through explicit UCMM connections.

Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit

Message Connection. The following Instance 1 attributes is supported

Attribute

ID

1

4

5

8

9

6

7

12

13

14

15

16

2

3

Table C.35 Connection Object Instance 1 Attributes:

Access

Rule

Get

State

Name

Get

Get

Instance Type



Get

Get


Get

Get



Get Consumed Connection Size

Get/Set Expected Packet Rate

Watchdog Action

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get


Length



Length


Data

Type

Value

USINT

0 = non-existent

1 = configuring

3 = established

4 = timed out

USINT 0 = Explicit Message

USINT

0x83 — Server, Transport

Class 3

UINT

UINT

USINT

10xxxxxx011 xxxxxx = node address


USINT 0x22

UINT 0x61

UINT 0x61

UINT in milliseconds

01 = auto delete


0

UINT

Empty

0

UINT

Empty

C-14


Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled I/O

Message Connection. The following Instance 2 attributes are supported

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

6

7

12

13

14

15

16


Attribute

ID

Access

Get

Get

Get

State

Name

Instance Type



Get


Get

Get

Get





Watchdog Action

Get/Set

Get

Get/Set


Length


Get


Length


Get/Set

Data

Type

Value

USINT

0 = non-existent

1 = configuring

3 = established

4 = timed out

USINT 1 = I/O Connection

USINT

0x82 — Server,

Transport Class 2 (If alloc_choice != polled and ack suppression is enabled then value =

0x80)

UINT

UINT

01111xxxxxx xxxxxx = node address


USINT 0x21

UINT 0…8

UINT 0…8


USINT

0 = transition to timed out

1 = auto delete

2 = auto reset

8

UINT

21 04 00 25 (assy inst)

00 30 03

8

UINT

21 04 00 25 (assy inst)

00 30 03


C-15

Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State/

Cyclic I/O Message Connection. The following Instance 4 attributes are supported

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12

13

14

15

16


Attribute

ID

Access

Rule

Get

Get

Get

State

Name

Instance Type



Get


Get


Get

Get

Get




Watchdog Action

Get

Get


Length


Get

Get

Get/Set


Length


Data

Type

Value

USINT

0 = non-existent

1 = configuring

3 = established

4 = timed out

USINT 1 = I/O Connection

USINT

UINT

UINT

0x00 (Cyclic, unacknowledged)

0x03 (Cyclic, acknowledged)


0x13 (COS, acknowledged)

01101xxxxxx xxxxxx = node address


USINT

0x02 (acknowledged)

0x0F (unacknowledged)

UINT 0…8

UINT 0…8


USINT

0 = transition to timed out

1 = auto delete

2 = auto reset

8

UINT

21 04 00 25 (assy inst)

00 30 03

8

UINT

21 04 00 25 (assy inst)

00 30 03

C-16


Instances 5…7 will be available Group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated through the UCMM. The following attributes are supported

Attribute

ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12

13

14

15

16

Table C.38 Connection Object Instance 5...7 Attributes:

Access

Rule

Get

State

Name

Instance Type

Get


Get


Get

Get

Get

Get

Get


Get

Get

Get

Get





Watchdog Action

Get


Length



Length


Data

Type

Value

USINT

USINT

USINT

0 = non-existent

1 = configuring

3 = established

4 = timed out

0 = Explicit

Message

0x83 — Server,

Transport Class 3

UINT

UINT



USINT 0x33 (Group 3)

UINT 0

UINT


USINT

01 = auto delete


0

UINT

Empty

0

UINT

Empty


Instances 8…11 are ZIP Consumers. The following instance attributes will be supported:

C-17

Table C.39 Connection Object instance 8...11 Attributes

13

14

15

16

4

5

8

9

6

7

12

2

3

Attribute

ID

Access

Rule

1 Get

State

Name

Get

Get

Get

Get

Instance Type




Get

Get



Get



Get

Get

Watchdog Action


Length


Get

Get


Length


Data

Type

Value

USINT

0=nonexistant

1=configuring

3=established

USINT 1=I/O Connection

USINT


UINT FFFF (not producing data)

UINT

01101xxxxxx xxxxxx=node address

USINT 0xF0 (unacknowledged)

UINT 0

UINT 8


USINT 2=auto reset

0

UINT

0

8

UINT

21 0E 03 25 01 00 30 02

The following services are implemented for the Connection Object

Table C.40 Connection Objects Common Services:

Service

Code

0x05

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service

Name

Reset



C-18


Discrete Input Point Object —


The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input

Point Object

Table C.41 Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes:

Attribute ID

1

2

Access Rule

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

Value

2

4

Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances will contain the following attributes

Table C.42 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes:

Attribute ID

3

115

116

Access Rule

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Value

Force Enable

Force Value

Data Type

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

Value

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 = Disable,

1 = Enable

0 = OFF, 1 = ON


Input Point Object

Table C.43 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

Yes

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name




C-19

Discrete Output Point Object —


The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output

Point Object:

Table C.44 Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes

Attribute ID

1

2

Access Rule

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

Value

1

10

Ten instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported.

Table C.45 summarizes the DOP instances:

Table C.45 Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes

Instance

ID

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

Name

Run Fwd

Output

Run Rev

Output

Reserved

Reserved

Drive Input 1

Drive Input 2

Drive Input 3

Drive Input 4

Drive Jog

Fwd

Drive Jog Rev

Alternate

Mapping

Description

0029 – 01

– 03

0029 – 01

– 04

Run Forward output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator

Run Reverse output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator none none none none none none

These four instances exist for Inverter units only.

They are connected to Drive Inputs 1…4.

This instances exists for Inverter units only none

10 none

All instances will contain the following attributes

Table C.46 Discrete Output Point Instance Attributes.

Attribute ID

3

5

6

7

8

113

114

115

116

Access Rule

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

➊

Get/Set

➊

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Value

Fault Action

Fault Value

Idle Action

Idle Value

Pr Fault Action

Pr Fault Value

Force Enable

Force Value

Data Type

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

Value

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 =

Hold Last State

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 =

Hold Last State

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 = Pr Fault Value attribute, 1 =

Ignore

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 = Disable, 1 =

Enable

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

➊ For DOP Instances 1 and 2, and 9 and 10, Attributes 113 and 114 have Get only access, and their values are always 0

C-20


Discrete Output Point Object

Special Requirements


Output Point Object

Table C.47 Discrete Output Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior

There are many sources that can affect an output point’s value: an I/O message, and explicit message, local logic, network fault and idle conditions, and protection fault conditions. An output point must know how to select which source of data to use to drive its value attribute.

An output that is not bound behaves much the same as in the

DeviceNet Specification. One notable addition to DOP behavior for the ArmorStart implementation is the Protection Fault Action and

Protection Fault Value attributes determine the behavior of the DOP when the ArmorStart faults on a protection fault.


C-21

The following State Transition Diagram is used for Unbound DOP

Instances 3…8 when they are not used in a Devicelogix

™ Program

Figure C.1 State Transition Diagram — Unbound DOP 3…8

Non-Existant

Power On

Available

DNet Fault

Protection Fault

DNet Fault Idle

DNet

Idle

Ready

DNet Fault



Protection F

Protection Fault

Protection Fault

Run

C-22


DOP Instances 1, 2, 9, and 10 Special Behavior

Besides the sources that can affect output points 3 and 4, DOPs 1 and

2 can be affected by keypad inputs since they double as the Run

Forward and Run Reverse outputs. This adds complexity to their behavior, so their behavior is defined in this section separately.

The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 1,

2, 9, and 10:

Figure C.2 DOP Instances 1, 2, 9, and 10

Power Off

Non-Existant

Power Up


Auto

Keyad "Hand"

Button Pressed

Hand State = Hand Stop

Keyad "Auto"

Button Pressed


Hand


The following State Transition Diagram is used in Auto State for

Unbound DOP Instances 1, 2, 9, and 10

C-23

Figure C.3 Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1, 2, 9, and 10

Auto Init

DNet Fault

Protection Fault

DNet Fault DNet Fault Idle

DNet

Idle

Ready

Receive Data

DNet Fault



Protection F

Protection Fault

Protection Fault

Run

C-24


Parameter Object — CLASS CODE

0x000F

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object

Table C.48 Parameter Object Class Attributes:

Attribute ID

1

2

8

9

Access Rule

Get

Get

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Parameter Class

Descriptor

Configuration

Assembly Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

WORD

UINT

The number of instances of the parameter object depends upon the type of Distributed Motor Controller. There will be a standard set of instances reserved (1…99) for all starters. These instances will be followed by a unique set of instances for each starter type (Bulletin

280G/281G or 284G).

4

5

6

7

19

20

21

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

8

9

10

The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes

Table C.49 Parameter Object Instance Attributes:

Attribute ID

1

2

3

Access Rule

Get/Set

Get

Get

Name

Value

Link Path Size

Link Path

Data Type


USINT

Array of:

• BYTE

• EPATH

WORD

EPATH

USINT

SHORT_STRING

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Descriptor

Data Type

Data Size

Parameter Name

String

Units String

Help String

Minimum Value

Maximum Value

Default Value

Scaling Multiplier

Scaling Divisor

Scaling Base

Scaling Offset

Multiplier Link

Divisor Link

Base Link

Offset Link

Decimal Precision

UINT

INT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

SHORT_STRING

SHORT_STRING




UINT

UINT


C-25


Object

Table C.50 Parameter Object Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

0x01

Class

Yes

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



Get_Attributes_All

Parameter Group Object — CLASS

CODE 0x0010

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object

Table C.51 Parameter Group Object Class Attributes:

Attribute ID

1

2

Access Rule

Get

Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Data Type

UINT

UINT

All Bulletin 284G Motor Starters have the following instances of the parameter group object:

• Instance 1 = DeviceLogix Parameters

• Instance 2 = DeviceNet Parameters

• Instance 3 = Starter Protection Parameters

• Instance 4 = User I/O Parameters

• Instance 5 = Miscellaneous

• Instance 6 = Drive DNet

• Instance 7 = ZIP Parameters

• Instance 8 = Basic Display

• Instance 9 = Basic Program

• Instance 10 = Advanced Program

C-26


The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances

Table C.52 Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes:

Attribute ID

3

4

1

2

N

Access Rule

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Name

Group Name String

Number of Members

First Parameter

Second Parameter

Nth Parameter

Data Type

SHORT_STRING

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT


Group Object

Table C.53 Parameter Group Object Service Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

Class

Yes

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Service

Name


Discrete Input Group Object —

CLASS CODE 0x001D

No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object.

A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported. It contains the following attributes

Table C.54 Discrete Input Instance Attributes:

Attribute ID

3

4

6

7

Access Rule

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Number of

Instances

Binding

Off_On_Delay

On_Off_Delay

Data Type

USINT

Array of UINT

UINT

UINT

Value

4

List of DIP instances in usec

In usec


Input Group Object

Table C.55 Discrete Input Group Object Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



Discrete Output Group Object —

CLASS CODE 0x001E


C-27

No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group

Object.

Two instances of the Discrete Output Group Object are supported.

They contain the following attributes

Attribute

ID

3

4

6

104

105

:

Table C.56 Discrete Output Group Instance 1Attributes

Access

Rule

Name

Get

Number of

Instances

Binding

Get

Get/Set Command

Get/Set

Get/Set

Network Status

Override

Comm Status

Override

Data

Type

Value

10

USINT

Array of

UINT

List of DOP instances; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9, 10

BOOL 0 = idle; 1 = run

BOOL

BOOL

0 = No Override (go to safe state)

1 = Override (run local logic)

0 = No override (go to safe state)

1 = Override (run local logic)

Table C.57 Discrete Output Group Instance 2 Attributes

Attribute

ID

3

4

9

10

7

8

113

114

Access

Rule

Name

Get

Number of

Instances

Binding

Get

Fault Action

Get/Set

Get/Set Fault Value

Idle Action

Get/Set

Get/Set Idle Value

Pr Fault Action

Get/Set

Get/Set Pr Fault Value

Data

Type

Value

4

USINT

Array of

UINT

5, 6, 7, 8

BOOL

0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold

Last State

BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON

BOOL

0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold

Last State


BOOL

0 = Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1 =

Ignore



Output Group Object

Table C.58 Discrete Output Group Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



C-28


Control Supervisor Object —


No class attributes will be supported. A single instance (instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object will be supported

Table C.59 Instance 1 — Control Supervisor Object.


9

10

12

100

101

7

8

3

4

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Run FWD

Run REV

Running FWD

Running REV

Ready

Tripped

Fault Reset

Keypad Mode

Keypad Disable

Warning Status

115

124

130

131

150

151

152

153

154

156

157

158

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Trip Enable

Trip Reset Mode

Trip Reset Level

High Speed Ena

Base Enclosure

Base Options

Wiring Options

Starter Enclosure

Last PR Trip

DB Status

DB Fault

Data Type

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

WORD

WORD

BOOL

USINT

BOOL

WORD

WORD

WORD

WORD

Value

These Run outputs also map to DOP instances 1 and 2.

0->1 = Trip Reset

0=Maintained; 1=Momentary

0=Not Disabled; 1=Disabled

Bits 0-1 = reserved

Bit 2 = reserved

Bit 3 = reserved

Bit 4 = reserved

Bit 5 = CP Warning

Bit 6 = IO Warning

Bit 7 = reserved

Bit 8 = reserved

Bit 9 = DN Warning


Bit 13 = HW Warning


Bit enumerated trip enable word

0=manual; 1=auto

0 – 100%; default = 75

0 = Disable; 1 = Enable

Bit 0 = IP67

Bit 1 = NEMA 4x

Bits 2-15 reserved

Bit 0 = Output Fuse



Bits 3-7 = Reserved

Bit 8 = 10A Base

Bit 9 = 25A Base


Bit 0 = Conduit

Bit 1 = Round Media


Bit 0 = IP67

Bit 1 = NEMA 4x

Bits 2-15 reserved

UINT

WORD

WORD

Bit 0 = DB Faulted

Bit 1 = DB Overtemp Warning

Bit 2= DB On

Bit 3= DB Flt Reset Inhibit

Bits 4-15 reserved

Bit 0 = DB Overtemp

Bit 1 = DB OverCurrent

Bit 2 = DB UnderCurrent

Bit 3 = DBShorted Switch

Bit 4 = DBOpen

Bit 5 = Reserved

Bit 6 = DBBus Voltage Link Open

Bit 7= Reserved

Bit 8= DB Comms



C-29

Acknowledge Handler Object

— CLASS CODE 0x002b

The following common services are implemented for the Control

Supervisor Object

Table C.60 Control Supervisor Object Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Implemented for

Class

No

No

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



No class attributes are supported for the Acknowledge Handler Object.

A single instance (Instance 1) of the Acknowledge Handler Object is supported. The following instance attributes are supported

Table C.61 Acknowledge Handler Instance Attributes:

Attribute

ID

1

2

3

Access

Rule

Name

Get/Set Acknowledge Timer

Get

Get

Retry Limit

COS Producing Connection Instance

Data

Type

Value

UINT milliseconds

USINT 1

UINT 4

The following common services are implemented for the Acknowledge

Handler Object

Table C.62 Acknowledge Handler Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



C-30


DeviceNet Interface Object —

CLASS CODE 0x00B4

This vendor specific object has no class attributes.

A single instance (Instance 1) of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported

Table C.63 DeviceNet Interface Object Instance Attribute:

Attribute ID

7

8

9

10

13

15

16

17

19

23

24

30

50

64

Access

Rule

Name

Get/Set Prod Assy Word 0




Get/Set Starter COS Mask

Get/Set Autobaud Enable

Consumed Assy

Get/Set

Produced Assy

Get/Set

Get/Set Set To Defaults

Get I/O Produced Size

Get

Get

I/O Consumed Size

DNet Voltage

Get/Set PNB COS Mask

Get/Set Unlock Identity Instances

Data Type Min./Max.

USINT

USINT

USINT

USINT

WORD

BOOL

USINT

0 — 0xFFFF

0 — 1

0…185

USINT

BOOL

USINT

UINT

WORD

USINT

100…187

0…1

0…8

0…8

0…0x00FF

Default

6

7

1

5

0xFFFF

1

160

(drive 164)

161

(drive 165)

0

Description





Change of state mask for starter bits

1 = enabled; 0 = disabled

3, 160, 162, 164, 166, 170, 182, 187, 188

52, 120, 161, 163, 165, 167, 171,

181…190

0 = No action; 1 = Reset

0

0

DeviceNet Voltage

Change of state mask for PNBs

Unlock when set to 99 hex

The following common services are implemented for the DeviceNet

Interface Object

Table C.64 DeviceNet Interface Object Common Services:

Service

Code

0x0E

0x10

Class

No

No

Implemented for

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service

Name



Appendix

D

Group Motor Installations

Application of ArmorStart®

Controllers in Group Installation

The following is a method of applying ArmorStart controllers using group motor installation rules as defined in the National Electric Code

(NEC 2005) and Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery (NFPA

79-2002).

1. List motors of the group in descending order of motor nameplate full load current.

2. Select disconnect means.

a. Sum all locked rotor currents of motors that can be started simultaneously using NEC Table 430.251.

b. Add to that value all the full load currents of any other motors or loads that can be operating at the same time as the motors that start simultaneously, using NEC Table 430.250.

c. Use the total current from a and b above to get an equivalent horsepower value from Table 430.251. That value is the size of the disconnect means in horsepower. (NEC 430.110)

3. Select fuse or circuit breaker protection: Select fuse or circuit breaker size for the largest motor per NEC Table 430.52 and add that ampere value to the total of the full load currents of the rest of the motors. The final value is the fuse or circuit breaker size required. (NEC 430.53C)

4. Select wire: Ampacity of wire feeding a group of motors is not less than 125% of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full load current ratings of all the motors in the group. (NEC 430.24)

5. The code states that any taps supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity not less than one third the ampacity of the branch circuit conductors. (NEC 430.53D) The branch circuit conductors can be defined as the conductors on the load side of the fuse block or circuit breaker. This requirement actually defines the size of the group of motors. For example, if the wire from the fuses or circuit breaker is AWG #8 with rated ampacity of 50 A, the smallest wire you can use as a tap and to the motors is AWG #14 with an ampacity of 20 A. (NEC Table 310.16 for 75

° C wire)

Note that the Bulletin 280 ArmorStart controllers will not accept wire greater than #10 wires at its input terminal blocks. The

ArmorStart cabling to the motor is UL Listed for the controller’s

Hp and is supplied with the ArmorStart controller or as an accessory when longer lengths are required.

D-2

Group Motor Installations

Group motor installations using the ArmorStart in distributed control applications will be largely dictated by the required motor Hp, their locations and the practical concerns of wire-cable routing on the equipment. It should be noted that Group motor installation are designed to use the actual motor Hp and current ratings in NEC Table

430.250 and not the ArmorStart controller’s rating. This allows for the possible standardization of ArmorStart controllers in an installation. An application can be designed using 5 Hp controllers for all motors between say 5 and 2 Hp and 1 Hp controllers for motors 1

Hp and less without having to oversize the wiring and short circuit protection that would result from using the larger ArmorStart controller’s rating.

In the case of using the Bulletin 284G VFD-ArmorStart the actual full-load current of the motor needs to multiplied by the ratio of the drive’s ratio of rated input current to output current to arrive at the actual full-load current. For example, in the case of a 2 Hp VFD-

ArmorStart being used to control a 1 Hp 2.1 A @ 460 V motor, the full-load amperes to be used for the Group motor calculation would be the 2 Hp VFD-ArmorStart’s (Rated Input Current / Rated Output

Current) x 1 Hp motor’s rated full-load current; (5.7 A / 4.0 A)2.1 A =

3.0 A.

The following is a group motor example calculation for a 460 V distributed application that requires two 10 Hp DOL-ArmorStart controlling 10 Hp and 5 Hp motors and four 2 Hp VFD-ArmorStarts controlling one 2 Hp motor and three 1 Hp motors. From NEC Table

430.250 the full-load current of the respective motors are:

Motor Hp

2

1

1

10

5

1

Motor FLC (A)

14

7.6

3.4

2.1

2.1

2.1


D-3

To design the motor circuit using a time delay fuse from NEC Table

430.52 to the rules of NEC 430.53C we start with the largest motor,

10 Hp, and calculate 14 A x 175% = 24.5 A. To this we add the FLC of the 5 Hp motor, 7.6 A, plus the other calculated drive currents for the motors controlled by the VFD-ArmorStarts. The calculated drive currents are given in the following Table:

1

1

2

1

Motor

Hp

Motor FLC

(A)

Drive Input to Output Current Ratio

(See ArmorStart Users Manual -

Appendix A)

Calculated Drive Current

(A)

3.4

2.1

2.1

2.1

5.57 A/4.0 A = 1.39

3.45 A/2.3 A = 1.5

3.45 A/2.3 A = 1.5

3.45 A/2.3 A = 1.5

3.4 x 1.39 = 4.72 A

2.1 x 1.5 = 3.15 A

2.1 x 1.5 = 3.15 A

2.1 x 1.5 = 3.15 A

The total current for the fuse ampacity is calculated in the following

Table:

Motor Hp

10

5

2

1

1

1

Motor FLC (A)

14

7.6

3.4

2.1

2.1

2.1

Total Fuse Current

TD Fuse Current (A)

24.5 A

7.6 A

4.72 A

3.15 A

3.15 A

3.15 A

46.4 A

Therefore the standard fuse available not exceeding 46.4 A is a 40 A fuse.

To calculate the wire ampacity and therefore the size of the motor branch conductor we use NEC 430.24 and calculate the sum of 125% of the largest motor’s FLC plus the FLC of the other motors in the group. The conductor ampacity calculation is given in the following

Table:

Motor Hp

1

1

2

1

10

5

Motor FLC (A)

14

7.6

3.4

2.1

Total Fuse Current

2.1

2.1

Wire Current (A)

14A x 1.25 =17.5A

7.6A

4.89 A

3.15 A

3.15 A

3.15 A

39.4 A

D-4


From NEC Table 310.16 we need to use 8 AWG for the motor branch circuit. Per NEC 430.28 the individual motor tap conductors can be sized down to 1/3 the ampacity of the trunk but not less than 125% of the specific motor’s FLC on the tap. This reduction is further conditionally based on the tap being not more than 25 feet. NFPA 79,

7.2.10.4 and Table 7.2.10.4 restrict the size reduction by the size of the branch circuit fuse size and tap conductor size. For the above case we have used a 40 A time-delay fuse. NFPA 79, Table 7.2.10.4 indicates that the smallest tap conductor can be 12 AWG. NEC Table

310.16 for wire ampacity allows 12 AWG (25 A) to be used in all taps for this application. See the final Group motor circuit design in the following figure:

8 AWG motor branch trunk

40A Time Delay or 50A Inverse Time CB

** 12 AWG motor trunk tap conductors are permissible with 40A Time Delay fuse; 14 AWG are permissible with 50A Inverse Time circuit breaker. (NFPA 79 Table 7.2.10.4)

**

*

10 HP DOL-AS 10 HP DOL-AS 2 HP VFD-AS 2 HP VFD-AS 2 HP VFD-AS 2 HP VFD-AS

SF=1.15

14A FLC

10 HP

SF=1.15

7.6A FLC

5 HP

SF=1.15

3.4A FLC

2 HP

SF=1.15

2.1A FLC

1 HP

SF=1.15

2.1A FLC

1 HP

SF=1.15

2.1A FLC

1 HP

*

Note, the ArmorStart and motor cable are UL Listed together and supplied by Rockwell Automation.


D-5

If the Group motor design were carried out with the intent to use an inverse-time circuit breaker from NEC Table 430.52 to the rules of

NEC 430.53C, we start with the largest motor, 10 Hp, and calculate

14A x 250% = 35 A to this we add the FLC of the 5 Hp motor, 7.6 A, plus the other calculated drive currents for the motors controlled by the VFD-ArmorStarts. The calculated drive currents are given in the following table:

Motor Hp

2

1

1

10

5

1

Motor FLC (A)

14

7.6

3.4

2.1

2.1

2.1

Total Fuse Current

Inverse-Time CB Current (A)

35 A

7.6 A

4.89 A

3.15 A

3.15 A

3.15 A

56.94 A

Therefore for the standard inverse-time circuit breaker available not exceeding 56.94 A we need to use a 50 A inverse-time circuit breaker.

This design will also allow the use of 8 AWG for the motor branch circuit. Continuing than and applying NEC 430.28 the individual motor tap conductors can be sized down to 1/3 the ampacity of the trunk and following the restrictions in NFPA 79, 7.2.10.4 and Table

7.2.10.4 for this case where we have used a 50 A inverse-time circuit breaker. NFPA 79, Table 7.2.10.4 indicates that the smallest tap conductor can now be 14 AWG. See the above figure for this Group motor circuit design.

The above method instructs one on applying ArmorStart controllers using group motor installation rules. Because of the ArmorStart’s capability, rating and Listing this method provides the minimum branch circuit wire and SCPD protection size that can be used. The

Armor Start has been evaluated and tested for group motor installations when being feed by a power source having 65,000 Amps available fault current. The ArmorStart is not a listed combination motor controller, however, but is Listed as Industrial Control

Equipment per UL 508 for group motor installations per NFPA 79.

Under this Listing the NEC and actually NFPA 79 puts an upper bound on the SCPD to be used. That upper bound is dictated by the maximum ratings in Table 7.2.10.4.

D-6


The rules and allowances for sizing of the over current protection for

NFPA 79 motor groups is covered by 7.2.10.4, Table 7.2.10.4 and

Table 13.5.6. These rules in Tables 7.2.10.4 and 13.5.6 are intended to limit the maximum SCPD for a group. Therefore each ArmorStart controller with its factory-supplied output motor cable is suitable for single-motor or multiple-motor group installations on industrial machinery when installed according to NFPA 79, 2002. The controller and output motor cable have been evaluated as a single system. The maximum over current device rating or setting is limited to the value in Table D.1 for the smallest user-supplied input line conductor, by the controller's maximum rating, or as allowed by the

UL Certificate of Compliances 012607-E3125, E96956, and E207834 for the combined use of ArmorStart and ArmorConnect components.

The Certificate of Compliances allow the ArmorStart Distributed

Motor Controllers Models 280*-*10*, 281*-*10*, and 284*-*10* respectively to be used with ArmorConnect input cable media 280*-

PWRM22*-M*, 280S-PWRM22*-M* Cable Assembly branch circuit taps, and 280*-M22*-M1 ArmorConnet Panel Mounting

Fittings when the group motor branch circuits are protected with a maximum 40 A non-time delay or a 20 A time delay, Class CC, T or F fuse.

These ArmorStart and ArmorConnect product UL Certification of

Compliances effectively extend Table D.1 to allow ArmorConnect branch circuit taps and mounting fittings constructed with 16 AWG conductor sized to be connected to appropriate ArmorStart motor controllers. See Table D.1.


D-7

Table D.1 Extended NFPA 79, Relationship Between Conductor Size and

Maximum Rating or Setting of Short-Circuit Protective Devices for Power Circuits

Conductor Size

(AWG)

16

➋

14

12

6

4

10

8

Max. Ratings

Non-Time Delay Fuse or

Inverse Time Circuit

Breaker

➊

(amperes)

40

➌

Time Delay or Dual Element

Fuse (amperes)

20

➍

60

80

30

40

100

150

200

250

50

80

100

125

➊ For 16 AWG conductors the branch circuit breaker must be marked for use the 16 AWG wire, NFPA

79, 12.6.1.1.

➋ The UL Certificate of Compliance for the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers models 280*-*10*,

281*-*10*, 283*-*10*, 284*-*10*; and ArmorConnect input cable media 280*-M22*-M*, 280S-

PWRM22*-M* cable assembly branch circuit taps, and 280*-M22*-M1 ArmorConnect panel mounting fittings allows 16 AWG conductors to be used when part of ArmorStart and ArmorConnect components.

➌ The 280*-PWRM22*-M* ArmorConnect cable assembly taps and 280*-22*-M1 panel mounted fittings with 16 AWG conductors are suitably protected when protected in the branch circuit by a 40A nontime delay fuse.

➍ The 280*-PWRM22*-M* ArmorConnect Cable Assembly taps and 280*-22*-M1 Panel Mounted Fittings with 16 AWG conductors are suitably protected when protected in the branch circuit by a 20A time delay fuse.

Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect

Three-Phase Power Media

When using ArmorConnect three-phase power media, fuses can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device, for the group motor installations. The following fuse types are recommended: Class

CC, T, or J type fuses. A 100 A circuit breaker (Allen-Bradley140

H-Frame) can be used for the motor branch protective device, for the group motor installations when using only the following

ArmorConnect Power Media components: 280-M35M-M1,

280-M35F-M1, 280-T35, and 280-PWRM35*-M*.

The Listed ArmorStart motor controllers with their factory supplied motor cable carries the marked maximum ratings shown in the following table.

Voltage

Sym. Amps RMS

Circuit Breaker

Fuse

➎

Max. Ratings

480Y/277

65 kA

100 A

100 A

➎ Class J, CC, and T fuses only.

D-8


To summarize, the design of the ArmorStart controllers in group motor applications is to be carried out as described above. The user supplied line side SCPD and wiring has to meet the minimum requirements determined above, however, the SCPD is required to protect the ArmorStart controller’s associated line side wiring only and can be increased to the values allowed in the maximum ratings tables above. Because the maximum line side conductor for the

ArmorStart is #10 AWG this is the maximum tap wire or daisy-chain wiring that can be used to take advantage of the ArmorStart’s maximum input ratings.

A benefit to the ArmorStart rating and the above design process using

NFPA rules is that the industrial equipment that utilizes several group motor installations on different branch circuits can standardize the size of the SCPD and the branch wiring for all the branch circuits of the installation as long as they do not exceed the maximum ratings of

Table D.1as extended by the UL Certificate of Compliances for combined ArmorStart and ArmorConnect installations, which ever is less.

Appendix

E

Accessories

Table E.1 DeviceNet™ Media

➊

Description

KwikLink pigtail drops are Insulation

Displacement Connector (IDC) with integral Class

1 round cables for interfacing devices or power supplies to flat cable

Length m (ft)

1 m (3.3)

2 m (6.5)

3 m (9.8)

6 m (19.8)

Cat. No.

Sealed

1485P-P1E4-B1-N5

1485P-P1E4-B2-N5

1485P-P1E4-B3-N5

1485P-P1E4-B6-N5

DeviceNet Mini- T-Port Tap

Right Keyway

Left Keyway

1485P-P1N5-MN5NF

1485P-P1N5-MN5KM

Gray PVC Thin Cable

Thick Cable

Connector

Mini Straight Female

Mini Straight Male


Mini Right Angle Male

Mini Right Angle Female

Mini Straight Male


Mini Straight Male


Mini Straight Male


Mini Right Angle Male


Mini Straight Male


Mini Straight Male

Length m (ft)

Cat. No.

1485G-P

➋

N5-M5

1485G-P

➋

W5-N5

1485G-P

➋

M5-Z5

1485G-P

➋

W5-Z5

1485C-P

➌

N5-M5

1485C-P

➌

W5-N5

1485C-P

➌

M5-Z5

1485C-P

➌

W5-Z5

Cat. No.

DeviceNet Configuration Terminal — Used to interface with objects on a DeviceNet network.

Includes 1 m communications cable.

Communication cable, color-coded bare leads

Communication cable, microconnector (male)

Panel Mount Adapter/Door Mount Bezel Kit

1 m (3.3)

1 m (3.3)

1 m (3.3)

—

193-DNCT

193-CB1

193-CM1

193-DNCT-BZ1

➊ See the On-Machine Connectivity catalog for complete cable selection information.

➋ Replace symbol with desired length in meters (Example: 1485G-P1N5-M5 for a 1 m cable). Standard cable lengths: 1 m, 2 m, 3 m, 4 m, 5 m, and 6 m.

➌ Replace symbol with desired length in meters (Example: 1485C-P1N5-M5 for a 1 m cable). Standard cable lengths: 1 m, 2 m, 3 m, 4 m, 5 m, 6 m, 8 m, 10 m, 12 m,

18 m, 24 m, and 30 m.

E-2

Accessories

Table E.2 Sensor Media

➊

Description

ArmorStart® I/O

Connection

Pin Count Connector Cat. No.

0

Straight Female

Straight Male

889D-F4ACDM-

➋

Input 5-Pin

Straight Female

Right Angle Male

889D-F4AACDE-

➋

0

0

DC Micro Patchcord

Straight Female

879D-F4ACDM-

➋

Input 5-pin

Right Angle Male

879D-R4ACM-

➋

0

DC Micro V-Cable

Straight Female

Straight Male

889R-F3AERM-

➋

Output 3-pin

Straight Female

Right Angle Male

899R-F3AERE-

AC Micro Patchcord

➊ See Publication M116-CA001A-EN-P for complete cable selection information.

➋ Replace symbol with desired length in meters (Example: 889D-F4ACDM-1 for a 1 m cable). Standard cable lengths: 1 m, 2 m, 5 m, and 10 m.

➋

Table E.3 Sealing Caps

Description

Plastic Sealing Cap (M12)

➌

For Use With

Input I/O Connection

➌

To achieve IP 67 rating, sealing caps must be installed on all unused I/O connections.

Cat. No.

1485A-M12

Table E.4 Locking Clips

Description

The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor cable to limit customer access.

Package QTY

10

10

Cat. No.

280-MTR22-LC

280-MTR35-LC

Accessories

E-3

IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor

Drive and

Motor Size kW

Part Number

400-480 Volt AC Input Drives

0.37 (0.5) 284R-360P500

0.75 (1) 284R-360P500

1.5 (2) 284R-360P500

2.2 (3)

4 (5)

284R-120P1K2

284R-120P1K2

Resistance

Ohms ± 5%

360

360

360

120

120


Continuous

Power kW

Max Energy kJ

Max Braking

Torque % of

Motor

Braking

Torque % of

Motor

Duty

Cycle %

0.086

0.086

0.086

0.26

0.26

17

17

17

52

52

305%

220%

110%

197%

124%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

47%

23%

12%

24%

13%


Braking

Torque % of

Motor

Duty

Cycle %

150%

150%

110%

150%

124%

31%

15%

11%

16%

10%

Note: Always check the resistor ohms against minimum resistance for drive being used.

Note: Duty Cycle listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration. For constance regen at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed. Application

Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque where possible. Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up to a maximum of 150%.

Figure E.1 Dynamic Brake Resistor Approximate Dimensions

A

H

C

B

D

J

E

F

G

Cat No.

A

mm (in.)

B

mm (in.)

C D

mm (in.)

E

mm (in.)

F

mm (in.)

G

mm (in.)

H

mm (in.)

J

mm (in.)

284R-091P500

284R-360P500

284R120P1K2

75 ± 3

(2.95 ± 0.12)

215 ± 5

(8.46 ± 0.2)

420 ± 5

(16.54 ± 0.2)

* 235 ± 5

(9.25 ± 0.2)

440 ± 5

(17.32 ± 0.2)

60 ± 2

(2.36 ± 0.08)

127

(5)

12.54

(0.49)

60 ± 2

(2.36 ± 0.08)

50 ± 1.5

(1.97 ± 0.06)

* Length is user-selectable based on the suffix added to the catalog number. For a length of 500±10mm, add -M05 to the end of the catalog number. For a length of

100±10mm, add -M1 to the end of the catalog number.

E-4

Notes:

Accessories

Appendix

F

ArmorStart Safety-Related Parts

Safety I/O Module and TÜV Requirements

Each ArmorStart Safety Distributed motor controller is intended to be combined with the 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 safety I/O module to form a subsystem that is part of the overall machine stop function. The motor controllers are connected to the safety I/O module through specified cable assemblies. The combination of one of these controllers, the safety module, and the specified interconnecting cables are referred to as the ArmorStart Safety-Related Parts. The part numbers for each of these components is specified below. The combination of these components is shown in Figure F.1. The safety I/O module and PLC program must be configured as outlined. See configuration of Safety

I/O Module and PLC program.

Table F.1 Safety-Related Parts

Catalog Number

280…S*

* - denotes safety version of Bulletin 280

281…S*


284…S*


1732DS-IB8XOBV4

889D-F4HJDM-*, 889D-F4AEDM-* or equivalent

* - denotes length

Description

Bulletin 280 Distributed Motor Controller – controller is full-voltage, non-reversing

Bulletin 281 Distributed Motor Controller – controller is full-voltage, reversing

Bulletin 281 Distributed Motor Controller – controller is variable-frequency AC drive

Guard I/O DeviceNet Safety Module

• SM cable assembly - Interconnecting cable assembly between safety module input and ArmorStart controller connector labeled “SM”.

Assembly provides contactor position feedback.

• A1/A2 cable assembly -

Interconnecting cable assembly between safety module output and

ArmorStart controller connector labeled “A1/A2”. Assembly provides output contactor coil power and controller power supply.

F-2

Safety I/O Module and TÜV Requirements

ArmorBlock® Guard I/O™

Modules

0

0

Description

ArmorBlock Guard I/O provides all the advantages of traditional distributed I/O for safety systems, but has an IP67 package that can be mounted directly on your machine. On-machine safety I/O reduces wiring time and startup costs for safety controller applications by eliminating electrical boxes and simplifying cable installation. The ArmorBlock family provides industrially hardened I/O blocks that you can mount directly on equipment near sensors or actuators. Wiring the I/O to the sensors and actuators is easy using pre-wired quick disconnect cables.

You can use Guard I/O with any safety controller that communicates on DeviceNet using CIP Safety for the control and monitoring of safety circuits. Guard I/O detects circuit failures at each I/O point while providing detailed diagnostics directly to the controller. With CIP Safety, you can easily integrate safety and standard control systems by using safety and standard messages on the same wire.

The 1732DS ArmorBlock Guard I/O family consists of 24V DC digital I/O modules that communicate on

DeviceNet networks. The I/O connectors are sealed M12 micro style while the network and auxiliary power connectors are sealed mini style. Plus, the ArmorBlock Guard I/O uses the same input and output M12 pin configuration as standard ArmorBlock and Maxum.

Cat. No.

1732DS-IB8XOBv4

Specifications

Electrical

Current Consumption

I/O Operating Voltage Range

Digital Inputs

Number of Inputs

Input Type

Voltage, On-State Input, Min.

Voltage, On-State Input, Max.

Current, On-State Input, Min.

Voltage, On-State Input, Min.

Digital Outputs

Number of Outputs

Output Type

Short Circuit Protection

Standard Pulse Test Outputs

Number of Pulse Test Sources

Pulse Test Output Current

Short Circuit Protection

Mechanical


Weight

Environmental

Operating Temperature

Relative Humidity

Vibration

Shock, Operating


Certifications

85 mA @ 24V DC

19.2…28.8V DC (24V DC +/- 20%)

8 safety single-channel or 4 safety dual-channel current sinking

11V DC

5V DC

3.3 mA

11V DC

4 safety solid-state dual-channel, current sourcing/current sinking pair

Yes

8

0.7 A per point

Yes

179 x 70 x 68.7 mm (7.05 x 2.76 x 2.71 in.)

600 g (1.2 lb)

-20…+60 °C (-4…+140 °F)

10…95%, non-condensing

0.76 mm @ 10…500 Hz

30 g

IP67

UL, CE, C-Tick, CSA, UL NRGF, ODVA Conformance, TÜV

Certified for fuctional safety up to SIL 3, Cat. 4


Micro Connector Pin Assignments

1

2

3

4

5

Pin


Input Configuration

Signal

Output Configuration

Pin Signal

Test Output n+1

Safe Input n+1

Input Common

Safe Input n

Test Output n

1

2

3

4

5

Output +24V DC Power

Output n+1 (sinking)

Output Power Common

Output n (sourcing)

Output Power Common

1

4

2

Female

Mini Connector Pin Assignments

Pin


Signal

1

2

3

4

5

Drain

V+ (Red)

V- (Black)

CAN_H (White)

CAN_L (Blue)

Male Female

5

3

F-3

Power Configuration Pin Assignments

Pin


Signal

3

4

1

2

Output +24V DC Power (Red)

Input +24V DC Power (Green)

Input Power Common (White)

Output Power Common (Black)

Male

ArmorBlock Guard I/O Recommended Compatible Cables and Connectors

Description

DC Micro (M12) Male Cordset

Cat. No.

889D-F4HJ-

➊

DC Micro Style Patchcord

M12 Terminal Chamber, Straight Male

M12 Terminal Chamber, Right Angle Male

➊ Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable length.

889D-F4HJDM-

➊

871A-TS4-DM

871A-TR4-DM

F-4


Figure F.1

Three-Phase Power Media

DeviceNet Media

I/O output

I/O input

The 1732DS Safety I/O module outputs to provided 24V DC power for control power to the ArmorStart - A1/A2 control input

Aux. Power

The 1732DS Safety I/O module inputs will monitor the status of the safety-rated contactors inside the ArmorStart -SM safety monitor input.

Safety Function Definition

The safety function is an uncontrolled stop. The uncontrolled stop is executed by removing the ArmorStart safety controller output voltage in response to a DeviceNet Safety network command.

Limitations of the Safety-Related Parts

The user must provide other components to implement the overall machine stop function. Example components are the DeviceNet safety network, a safety PLC, and a safety input module.

Detection of the contactor state is provided so that a Category 4 architecture can be implemented for the overall machine stop function. The user must provide a safety PLC and program to process the “SM” feedback as required by Category 4. See configuration of safety I/O module and Safety PLC Program.


Configuration of the 1732DS-IBXOBV4 Safety I/O Module and

PLC Program

The safety module must be configured as follows:

Configure the output that is connected to the I/O output cable assembly for:

F-5

• Dual (bipolar mode)

• Safety Pulse Test

Configure the input that is connected to the I/O Input cable assembly as follows:

• Channel = Single

• Mode = Pulsed Test Input from test output X

• Source = Pulsed output from X

ArmorStart Controller - none required

Safety PLC Program – the program must:

• Force the output contactors to the open state when a safetyrelated stop is demanded.

• Force the output contactors to remain in the open state if the SM feedback is open after a safety-related stop is executed (see Note

1 and Note 2).

Note 1: The program must inhibit the contactor closure to satisfy safety category 4 of 13849-1.

Note 2: The SM feedback logic should be implemented only after a safetyrelated stop for the Bulletin 280/281 controllers. It should be ignored during normal operation. One of the series contactors is used for the normal stop/start function for these controllers. Therefore, a malfunctioning contactor circuit cannot be distinguished from a normal running state.

Refer to Publication SAFETY-AT018*, for programming examples.

F-6


Safety-Related Specifications

Component Response Time

Component

1732DS-IB8XOBV4

Bulletin 280

Bulletin 281

Bulletin 284

Response Time (ms)

See Publication 1732DS-IN001*

20…40

20…40

8…12

Probability of Dangerous Failure per hour and MTTF

d

for

Uncontrolled Stop

ArmorStart Safety Controller used in

Combination of ArmorStart Safety-

Related Parts

Bulletin 280…

Bulletin 281…

Bulletin 284…

MTTFd

(years)

100

100

100

Average probability of dangerous failure per hour

(1/h)

5.7E-9

6.0E-9

6.0E-9

Maintenance and Internal Part

Replacement

The ArmorStart Safety controllers do not have any internal maintenance procedures or internal replacement parts. Refer to the

1732DS-IB8XOBV4 safety module documentation for maintenance requirements pertaining to it. It is recommended that the operation of the 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 safety module and the ArmorStart output contactor circuits be verified once per year by performing the contactor circuit verification procedure. The contactor circuit verification procedure must be performed on an ArmorStart Safety controller that has experienced an output short-circuit fault prior to placing the controller back into service.

Contactor Circuit Verification Procedure

Initiate a stop from the safety PLC to the 1732DS-IB8XOBV4

• Verify that the ArmorStart controller output motor voltage is removed.

• Verify that the SM feedback to the safety PLC transitions to the open state.

Troubleshooting


1732DS-IB8XOBV4 Safety Module

Refer to 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 documentation for trouble shooting instructions.

ArmorStart Safety Bulletin 280/281/284 Distributed Motor

Controllers Safety Circuit Troubleshooting

F-7

Symptom

ArmorStart Controller LED Status

Indication

Motor will not start

Power

Off

Fault

Off

Run

Off

Off

On

On

On

Flashing

Off

Flashing

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Probable Cause Recommended Action

1.

The disconnect switch of the ArmorStart controller is open.

2.

24 VDC not supplied to A1 and A2 at

A1/A2 connector because cable or connections are defective.

3.

1732DS-IB8XOBV4 not supplying 24 VDC to A1 and A2 pins of A1/A2 cable.

There is an ArmorStart controller fault.

After non-safety stop

➀

1.

The controller is not receiving a RUN command.

1.

Check disconnect switch.

2.

Verify cable and connections.

3.

Refer to IN PWR/OUT PWR Indicators in

1732DS-IB8XOBV4 manual.

Refer to ArmorStart Manual for controller fault.

After non-safety stop

➀

1.

Check RUN command source.

After safety stop

➁

1.

The controller is not receiving a RUN command.

2.

SM cable connections (SM1, SM2) open.

3.

SM feedback is open inside control module.

4.

1732DS-IB8XOBV4 is reporting open SM feedback from the IN0...INn inputs.

ArmorStart controller fault is inhibiting

ArmorStart controller start function.

After safety stop

➁

1.

Check RUN command source.

2.

Check SM cable and connections.

3.

Check SM feedback inside control module.

4.

Refer to I/O Indicators in


Refer to ArmorStart Manual for controller fault.

1.

Three-phase power is not being supplied to controller (Bulletin 280/281 controllers).

2.

24 VDC not supplied to P and M at A1/A2 connector because cable or connections are defective.

3.

1732DS-IB8XOBV4 OUT0...OUTn outputs are not supplying 24 VDC to pins P and M of A1/A2 cable assembly.

1.

Verify 3-phase voltage at ArmorStart controller input.

2.

Verify cable and connections.

3.

Refer to I/O Indicators in


➀

Non-safety stop – The 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 does not remove 24V DC from P and M of A1/A2 when a non-safety stop is executed. Restarting the controller after a non-safety stop is not inhibited by the safety circuit.

➁

Safety stop – The 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 removes 24V DC from P and M of A1/A2 when a safety stop is executed. This opens both contactors. Restarting the controller stop is inhibited if the SM feedback is open. The program in the safety controller does not permit the 1732DS-IB8XOBV4 to apply 24V DC to P and M in the A1/A2 cable.

F-8

Notes:


Appendix

G

Renewal Parts

Figure G.1 Bulletin 280G/281G Control Module Renewal Part Catalog

Structure

Bulletin Number

280

281

Full Voltage Starter

Reversing Starter

280 G – F 12D – N B – RG

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

G

with six inputs

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

Contactor Size/Control Voltage

120V AC

12D

23D

Motor Connection

RG

Round

Control Module

N

Control Module Only

Overload Selection

Current Range

B

0.5…2.5 A

C

D

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection

Table G.1 Full Voltage Starters — IP67/NEMA Type 4, Up to 460V AC

Cat. No.

Current Rating

(A)

0.5…2.5

1.1…5.5

3.2…16

kW

400V AC

50 Hz

0.75

2.2

7.5

Hp

460V AC

60 Hz

1

3

10

120V AC

280G-F12D-NB-RG

280G-F12D-NC-RG

280G-F23D-ND-RG

Table G.2 Reversing Starters — IP67/NEMA Type 4, Up to 460V AC

Cat. No.

Current Rating

(A)

0.5…2.5

1.1…5.5

3.2…16

kW

400V AC

50 Hz

0.75

2.2

7.5

Hp

460V AC

60 Hz

1

3

10

120V AC

281G-F12D-NB-RG

281G-F12D-NC-RG

281G-F23D-ND-RG

G-2

Renewal Parts

Figure G.2 Bulletin 280G Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

280 G – F N – 10 – RG

Bulletin Number

280

Starter

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

G

with six inputs

Line Connection

RG

ArmorConnect™ Power Media

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

N

Base Only

No Control Module

Short Circuit Protection (Bul. 140M)

10

10 A Rated Device

25

25 A Rated Device

Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection

Table G.3 Bul. 280G Full Voltage Starters & Bul. 281G Reversing Starters —

IP67/NEMA Type 4, Up to 460V AC with ArmorConnect

Connectivity kW Hp

Current Rating

(A)

Cat. No.

0.5…2.5

1.1…5.5

3.2…16

400V AC

50 Hz

0.75

2.2

7.5

460V AC

60 Hz

1

3

10

280G-FN-10-RG

280G-FN-10-RG

280G-FN-25-RG

Renewal Parts

G-3

Figure G.3 Bulletin 280G/281G Safety Control Module Renewal Part Catalog

Structure

Bulletin Number

280

Full Voltage Starter

281

Reversing Starter

280 G – F 12S – N B – RG

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

G

with six inputs

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

Contactor Size/Control Voltage

24V DC

12D

23D

Motor Connection

RG

Round

Control Module

N

Control Module Only

Overload Selection

B

C

D

Current Range

0.5…2.5 A

1.1…5.5 A

3.2…16 A

Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection

Table G.4 Full Voltage Starters — IP67/NEMA Type 4, Up to 460V AC

Cat. No.

Current Rating

(A)

0.5…2.5

1.1…5.5

3.2…16

kW

400V AC

50 Hz

0.75

2.2

7.5

Hp

460V AC

60 Hz

1

3

10

24V DC

280G-F12S-NB-RG

280G-F12S-NC-RG

280G-F23S-ND-RG

Table G.5 Reversing Starters — IP67/NEMA Type 4, Up to 460V AC

Cat. No.

Current Rating

(A)

0.5…2.5

1.1…5.5

3.2…16

kW

400V AC

50 Hz

0.75

2.2

7.5

Hp

460V AC

60 Hz

1

3

10

24V DC

281G-F12S-NB-RG

281G-F12S-NC-RG

281G-F23S-ND-RG

G-4

Renewal Parts

Figure G.4 Bulletin 280G Safety Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

280 G – F S – 10 – RG

Bulletin Number

280

Starter

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

G

with six inputs

Line Connection

RG


Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

S

Base Only

No Control Module

Short Circuit Protection (Bul. 140M)

10

10 A Rated Device

25

25 A Rated Device

Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection

Table G.6 Bul. 280G Full Voltage Starters & Bul. 281G Reversing Starters —

IP67/NEMA Type 4, Up to 460V AC with ArmorConnect

Connectivity kW Hp

Current Rating

(A)

Cat. No.

0.5…2.5

1.1…5.5

3.2…16

400V AC

50 Hz

0.75

2.2

7.5

460V AC

60 Hz

1

3

10

280G-FS-10-RG

280G-FS-10-RG

280G-FS-25-RG

Renewal Parts

Figure G.5 Bulletin 284G Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

G-5

284 D – F V D2P3 D – N – RG – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3

Bulletin

Number

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

Option 3

EMI

EMI Filter

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

Torque Performance Mode

V

Sensorless Vector

Control Volts per Hz

Control Module

N

Control Module Only

Control Voltage

D

120V AC

Option 2

CB

Control Brake Connector

DB1

DB Brake Connector for IP67

Dynamic Brake Resistor

Option 1

Blank Status Only

Output Current

Code

D1P4

D2P3

D4P0

D6P0

D7P0

Output

Current

[A] kW

480V Drive

1.4

2.3

4

6

7.6

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4

Hp

0.5

1

2

3

5

Motor Media Type

RG

Round

Table G.7 Bulletin 284G Control Module with Sensorless Vector Control ,

IP67/NEMA 4, Up to 600V

Input Voltage

380…480V

50/60 Hz

3-Phase

kW

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.0

Hp

0.5

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

Output

Current

1.4 A

2.3 A

4.0 A

6.0 A

7.6 A

Cat. No.

120 V AC

Control Voltage

284G-FVD1P4D-N-RG-CB-DB1-EMI





G-6

Renewal Parts


280 G – F N – 10 – RG

Bulletin

Number

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

Base

N

Base Only — no starter

Line Media

RG


Short-Circuit Protection

Bulletin 140 Current Rating (A)

10

25

10 A Rated Device

25 A Rated Device

Base Module Renewal Part

Product Selection

Table G.8 Bulletin 284G Base Module Renewal Part, IP67/NEMA 4, Up to

600V AC with ArmorConnect™ Connectivity

Input Voltage kW Hp

Output

Current

Cat. No.

380…480V

50/60 Hz

3-Phase

0.4…2.2

3.0

0.5…3.0

5.0

1.4…4.0 A

6.0…7.6 A

280G-FN-10-RG

280G-FN-25-RG

Renewal Parts

Figure G.7 Bulletin 284G Safety Control Module Renewal Part Catalog

Structure

G-7

284 D – F V D2P3 S – N – RG – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3

Bulletin

Number

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

Option 3

EMI

EMI Filter

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

Torque Performance Mode

V

Sensorless Vector

Control Volts per Hz

Control Module

N

Control Module Only

Control Voltage

S

24V DC

Option 2

CB

Control Brake Connector

DB1

DB Brake Connector for IP67

Dynamic Brake Resistor

Option 1

Blank Status Only

Output Current

Code

D1P4

D2P3

D4P0

D6P0

D7P0

Output

Current

[A] kW

480V Drive

1.4

2.3

4

6

7.6

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4

Hp

0.5

1

2

3

5

Motor Media Type

RG

Round

Table G.9 Bulletin 284G Control Module with Sensorless Vector Control ,

IP67/NEMA 4, Up to 600V

Input Voltage

380…480V

50/60 Hz

3-Phase

kW

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.0

Hp

0.5

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

Output

Current

1.4 A

2.3 A

4.0 A

6.0 A

7.6 A

Cat. No.

120 V AC

Control Voltage

284G-FVD1P4S-N-RG-CB-DB1-EMI





G-8

Renewal Parts


280 G – F S – 10 – RG

Bulletin

Number

Communications

D

DeviceNet™

Enclosure Type

F

Type 4 (IP67)

Base

S

Base Only — no starter

Line Media

RG


Short-Circuit Protection

Bulletin 140 Current Rating (A)

10

25

10 A Rated Device

25 A Rated Device

Base Module Renewal Part

Product Selection

Table G.10 Bulletin 284G Base Module Renewal Part, IP67/NEMA 4, Up to

600V AC with ArmorConnect™ Connectivity

Input Voltage kW Hp

Output

Current

Cat. No.

380…480V

50/60 Hz

3-Phase

0.4…2.2

3.0

0.5…3.0

5.0

1.4…4.0 A

6.0…7.6 A

280G-FS-10-RG

280G-FS-25-RG

1

PID Loop

Appendix

H

PID Setup

The Bulletin 284G ArmorStart® Distributed Motor with sensorless vector control has a built-in PID (proportional, integral, differential) control loop.

The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback (such as pressure, flow, or tension) at a desired set point. The PID loop works by subtracting the

PID feedback from a reference and generating an error value. The PID loop reacts to the error, based on the PID Gains, and outputs a frequency to try to reduce the error value to 0. To enable the PID loop, Parameter 232 (PID Ref

Sel) must be set to an option other than 0 PID Disabled.

Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where the

PID loop may be used.

Exclusive Control

In Exclusive Control, the Speed Reference becomes 0, and the PID Output becomes the entire Freq Command. Exclusive Control is used when

Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is set to option 1, 2, 3, or 4. This configuration does not require a master reference, only a desired set point, such as a flow rate for a pump.

PID Ref

PID Fdbk

–

+

PID

Error

PID Loop

PID Prop Gain

PID Integ Time

+

+

+

PID Diff Rate

PID

Output

PID Enabled

Accel/Decel

Ramp

Freq

Command

Example

• In a pumping application, the PID Reference equals the Desired System

Pressure set point.

• The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.

Fluctuations in actual system pressure, due to changes in flow, result in a PID Error value.

• The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor shaft speed to correct for the PID Error value.

• The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the system are opened and closed causing changes in flow.

• When the PID Control Loop is disabled, the Commanded Speed is the

Ramped Speed Reference.

PID Feedback =

Pressure Transducer Signal

Pump

PID Reference =

Desired System Pressure

H-2

PID Setup

Trim Control

In Trim Control, the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference. In

Trim mode, the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel/decel ramp as shown. Trim Control is used when Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is set to option 5, 6, 7, or 8.

PID Ref

PID Fdbk

–

+

PID

Error

PID Loop

PID Prop Gain

PID Integ Time

+

+

+

PID Diff Rate

PID

Output

PID Enabled

Speed Ref

Accel/Decel

Ramp

+

+

Output

Freq

Example

• In a winder application, the PID Reference equals the

Equilibrium set point.

• The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.

Fluctuations in tension result in a PID Error value.

• The Master Speed Reference sets the wind/unwind speed.

• As tension increases or decreases during winding, the Speed

Reference is trimmed to compensate. Tension is maintained near the Equilibrium set point.

PID Reference =

Equilibrium Set Point

0 Volts

PID Feedback =

Dancer Pot Signal

10 Volts

Speed Reference

PID Setup

H-3

PID Reference and Feedback

Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is used to enable the PID mode

(Parameter 232 ¦ 0 PID Disabled) and to select the source of the PID

Reference. If A132 (PID Ref Sel) is not set to 0 PID Disabled, PID can still be disabled by select programmable digital input options

(Parameters 151…154) such as Jog, Local, or PID Disable.

Option

0

PID Disabled

1

PID Setpoint

4

Comm Port

5

Setpnt, Trim

8

Comm, Trim

Disables the PID loop (default setting)

Description

Selects Exclusive Control. Parameter 137 (PID Setpoint) will be used to set the value of the PID Reference

Selects Exclusive Control. The reference word from a communication network

DeviceNet

™

becomes the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) x 10 = 100% reference. For example, with

(Maximum Freq) = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% reference.

Selects Trim Control. Parameter 137 (PID Setpoint) will be used to set the value of the

PID Reference.

Selects Trim Control. The reference word from a communication network DeviceNet becomes the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled so that

Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) x 10 = 100% reference. For example, with (Maximum

Freq) = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% reference.

Parameter 233 (PID Feedback Sel) is used to select the source of the

PID feedback.

Option

2

Comm Port

Description

The Consumed Assembly (Instance 164 — Default Consumed Inverter Type Distributed

Motor Controller) from a communication network (see page C-9 for details on the

Consumed Assembly) which becomes the PID Feedback. The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) x 10 = 100% Feedback. For example, with (Maximum Freq) = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% Feedback.

PID Deadband

Parameter 238 (PID Deadband) is used to set a range, in percent, of the PID Reference that the drive will ignore.

Example

• (PID Deadband) is set to 5.0

• The PID Reference is 25.0%

• The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between

20.0 and 30.0%

H-4

PID Setup

PID Preload

The value set in Parameter 239 (PID Preload), in Hertz, will be preloaded into the integral component of the PID at any start or enable.

This will cause the drive’s frequency command to initially jump to that preload frequency, and the PID loop starts regulating from there.

PID Enabled

PID Pre-load Value

PID Output

Freq Cmd

PID Pre-load Value > 0

PID Limits

Parameter 230 (PID Trim Hi) and Parameter 231 (PID Trim Lo) are used to limit the PID output and are only used in trim mode. (PID

Trim Hi) sets the maximum frequency for the PID output in trim mode. (PID Trim Lo) sets the reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode. Note that when the PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit, the PID regulator stops integrating so that windup does not occur.

PID Gains

The proportional, integral, and differential gains make up the PID regulator.

• Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain)

The proportional gain (unitless) affects how the regulator reacts to the magnitude of the error. The proportional component of the

PID regulator outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error. For example, a proportional gain of 1 would output 100% of maximum frequency when the PID error is 100% of the analog input range. A larger value for (PID Prop Gain) makes the proportional component more responsive, and a smaller value makes it less responsive. Setting (PID Prop Gain) to 0.00 disables the proportional component of the PID loop.

PID Setup

H-5

• Parameter 235 (PID Integ Time)

The integral gain (units of seconds) affects how the regulator reacts to error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error. For example, with an integral gain of 2 seconds, the output of the integral gain component would integrate up to 100% of maximum frequency when the PID error is 100% for 2 seconds.

A larger value for (PID Integ Time) makes the integral component less responsive, and a smaller value makes it more responsive. Setting (PID Integ Time) to 0 disables the integral component of the PID loop.

• Parameter 236 (PID Diff Rate)

The Differential gain (units of 1/seconds) affects the rate of change of the PID output. The differential gain is multiplied by the difference between the previous error and current error.

Thus, with a large error the D has a large effect and with a small error the D has less of an effect. This parameter is scaled so that when it is set to 1.00, the process response is 0.1% of (Maximum

Freq) when the process error is changing at 1%/second. A larger value for (PID Diff Rate) makes the differential term have more of an effect and a small value makes it have less of an effect. In many applications, the D gain is not needed. Setting (PID Diff

Rate) to 0.00 (factory default) disables the differential component of the PID loop.

Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains

1. Adjust the proportional gain. During this step it may be desirable to disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to

0. After a step change in the PID Feedback:

• If the response is too slow increase Parameter 234 (PID Prop

Gain).

• If the response is too quick and/or unstable (see Figure H.1), decrease Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain).

• Typically, Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain) is set to some value below the point where the PID begins to go unstable.

2. Adjust the integral gain (leave the proportional gain set as in Step

1). After a step change in the PID Feedback:

• If the response is too slow (see Figure H.2), or the PID

Feedback does not become equal to the PID Reference, decrease Parameter 235 (PID Integ Time).

• If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling out (see Figure H.3), increase Parameter 235 (PID

Integ Time).

H-6

PID Setup

3. At this point, the differential gain may not be needed. However, if after determining the values for Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain) and Parameter 235 (PID Integ Time):

• Response is still slow after a step change, increase Parameter

236 (PID Diff Rate).

• Response is still unstable, decrease Parameter 236 (PID Diff

Rate).

The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at different points during adjustment of the PID Gains.

Figure H.1 Unstable

PID Reference

PID Feedback

Time

Figure H.2 Slow Response — Over-Damped

PID Reference

PID Feedback

Time

Figure H.3 Oscillation — Under-Damped

PID Reference

PID Feedback

Time

Figure H.4 Good Response — Critically Damped

PID Reference

PID Feedback

Time

1

Appendix

I

Step Logic, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter

Functions

Four Bulletin 284G ArmorStart® logic functions provide the capability to program simple logic functions without a separate controller.

• Step Logic Function

Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic.

Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from digital inputs programmed as Logic In1 and Logic In2 before stepping from one preset speed to the next. A timer is available for each of the eight steps and is used to program a time delay before stepping from one preset speed to the next. The status of a digital output can also be controlled based on the step being executed.

• Basic Logic Function

Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as Logic In1 and/or Logic

In2. A digital output can be programmed to change state based on the condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic functions such as

AND, OR, NOR. The basic logic functions can be used with or without step logic.

• Timer Function

A digital input can be programmed for Timer Start. A digital output can be programmed as a Timer Out with an output level programmed to the desired time. When the timer reaches the time programmed into the output level the output will change state. The timer can be reset via a digital input programmed as Reset Timer.

• Counter Function

A digital input can be programmed for Counter In. A digital output can be programmed as Counter Out with an output level programmed to the desired number of counts. When the counter reaches the count programmed into the output level the output will change state. The counter can be reset via a digital input programmed as Reset Counter.

I-2

Step Logic, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions

Step Logic Using Timed Steps

To activate this function, set Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) to 6

Stp Logic. Three parameters are used to configure the logic, speed reference, and time for each step.

• Logic is defined using Parameters 240…247 (Stp Logic x).

• Preset Speeds are set with Parameters 170…177 (Preset Freq x).

• Time of operation for each step is set with Parameters 250…257

(Stp Logic Time x).

The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse.

Figure I.1

Using Timed Steps

Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7

Forward

0

Reverse

Time

Step Logic Sequence

• Sequence begins with a valid start command.

• A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transitions to the next step when the corresponding step logic time has expired.

• Step 7 is followed by Step 0.

• Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs.

Step Logic Using Basic Logic

Functions


I-3

Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use logic to transition to the next step. Logic In1 and Logic In2 are defined by programming Parameters 151…154 …Digital Inx Sel… to

Option 23 Logic In1 or Option 24 Logic In2.

Example

• Run at Step 0.

• Transition to Step 1 when Logic In1 is true.

Logic senses the edge of Logic In1 when it transitions from Off to On. Logic In1 is not required to remain On.

• Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In1 and Logic In2 are true.

The drive senses the level of both Logic In1 and Logic In2 and transitions to Step 2 when both are On.

• Transition to Step 3 when Logic In2 returns to a false or Off state.

Inputs are not required to remain in the On condition except under the logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to

Step 3.

Figure I.2

Start Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Frequency

Logic In1

Logic In2

Time

The step time value and the basic logic may be used together to satisfy machine conditions. For instance, the step may need to run for a minimum time period and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition to the next step.

Figure I.3

Start Step 0 Step 1

Frequency

Logic In1

Logic In2

Time

I-4


Timer Function

Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured with Parameters 151…154 (Digital Inx Sel) set to 18

Timer Start and 20 Reset Timer.

Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached. Level Parameters 156 (Relay Out Level),

159 (Opto Out1 Level), and 162 (Opto Out2 Level) are used to set the desired time in seconds.

Parameters 155 (Relay Out Sel), 158 (Opto Out1 Sel), and 161 (Opto

Out2 Sel) are set to option 16 Timer Out and cause the output to change state when the preset level is reached.

Counter Function

Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are configured with Parameters 151…154 (Digital Inx Sel) set to 19

Counter In and 21 Reset Counter.

Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached. Level Parameters 156 (Relay Out Level),

159 (Opto Out1 Level), and 162 (Opto Out2 Level) are used to set the desired count value.

Parameters 155 (Relay Out Sel), 158 (Opto Out1 Sel), and 161 (Opto

Out2 Sel) are set to 17 Counter Out which causes the output to change state when the level is reached.

Example

• A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line.

• An accumulator holds the packages until five are collected.

• A diverter arm redirects the group of five packages to a bundling area.

• The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit switch that resets the counter.

• Parameters are set to the following options:

• 151 (Digital In1 Sel) set to 19 to select Counter In

• 152 (Digital In2 Sel) set to 21 to select Reset Counter

• 155 (Relay Out Sel) set to 17 to select Counter Out

• 156 (Relay Out Level) set to 5.0 (counts)


Step Logic Parameters

Digit 3

0

Setting

2

3

0

1

4

5

6

9

A

7

8 b

Digit 2

0

Digit 1

F

Digit 0

1

Accel/Decel Parameters Used Step Logic Output State Commanded Direction

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

FWD

REV

No Output

FWD

REV

No Output

FWD

REV

No Output

FWD

REV

No Output

Setting

6

7

8

4

5

9

A

2

3

0

1

Jump to Step 0

Jump to Step 1

Jump to Step 2

Jump to Step 3

Jump to Step 4

Jump to Step 5

Jump to Step 6

Jump to Step 7

End Program (Normal Stop)

End Program (Coast to Stop)

End Program and Fault (F2)

Logic

Setting

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

0

1

Description

Skip Step (jump immediately).

Step based on the time programmed in the respective (Stp Logic Time x) parameter.

Step if Logic In1 is active (logically true).


Step if Logic In1 is not active (logically false).


Step if either Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active (logically true).

Step if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is active (logically true).

Step if neither Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active (logically true).

SKIP

TIMED

TRUE

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

OR

AND

NOR

Logic

I-5

I-6

Setting

E

F

C d

8

9

A b

6

7

4

5

0

1

2

3

Setting

b

C d

9

A

E

F


Description

Step if Logic In1 is active (logically true) and Logic In2 is not active (logically false).


Step after (Stp Logic Time x) and Logic In1 is active (logically true).


Step after (Stp Logic Time x) and Logic In1 is not active (logically false).


Do not step OR no jump to, so use Digit 0 logic.

Description

Skip Step (jump immediately).

Step based on the time programmed in the respective (Stp Logic Time x) parameter.





Step if either Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active (logically true).

Step if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is active (logically true).

Step if neither Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active (logically true).







Use logic programmed in Digit 1.

Logic

XOR

XOR

TIMED AND

TIMED AND

TIMED OR

TIMED OR

IGNORE

Logic

SKIP

TIMED

TRUE

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

OR

AND

NOR

XOR

XOR

TIMED AND

TIMED AND

TIMED OR

TIMED OR

IGNORE

Notes:


I-7

I-8

Notes:


.

Publication 280G-UM001C-EN-P - February 2010

Supercedes Publication 280G-UM001B-EN-P — May 2009

Copyright ©2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.